Home

670 388-20 - heidenhain

1. contour description programs is limited to 128 contours The number of possible contour elements depends on the type of contour inside or outside contour and the number of contour descriptions You can program up to 16384 contour elements The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all Complex Contour Formula The SL cycles with contour formula presuppose a structured program layout and enable you to save frequently used contours in individual programs Using the contour formula you can connect the subcontours to a complete contour and define whether it applies to a pocket or island In its present form the SL cycles with contour formula function requires input from several areas in the TNC s user interface This function is to serve as a basis for further development mMm a3 JE Q 5 0 Q a O0 O 3 DD os a Sc 5 og cS 2e Ha cS D9 5 5 re gt Pp r 9 1 SL Cycles 228 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il Properties of the subcontours Example Program structure Calculation of the l subcontours with contour formula By default the TNC assumes that the contour is a pocket Do not program a radius compensation In the contour formula you can convert a pocket to an island by making it negative The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are
2. m x D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO G417 G417 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 417 measures any coordinate in the touch probe axis and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the programmed starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the positive direction of the touch probe axis 2 Then the touch probe moves in its own axis to the coordinate entered as starting point 1 and measures the actual position with a simple probing movement 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and 0305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below Q160 Actual value of measured point Please note while programming tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC then sets Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a the datum in this axis TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO lt m _ ae LO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 369 il m Cycle parameters q 417
3. If you have entered the corresponding GLOBAL DEF functions at the panuor E E E E E E E beginning of the program then you can link to these globally valid Direction Climb 1 Up cut 1 values when defining any canned cycle S Toop eal iz asee Co C 5 L X 20 Y 30 R FMAX M3 6 CYCL DEF 264 THREAD DRILLNG MLLNG Proceed as follows fo ee i Q201 18 DEPTH OF THREAD W aN Q 356 2 TOTAL HOLE DEPTH Select the Programming and Editing operating mode MEERE MMM CLING OR UP CUT ae Q258 0 2 UPPER ADV STOP DIST Select the canned cycles qase 8 DEPTH AY FRONT aoe RE e aasi EE Select the desired group of cycles for example G296 159 TEED RATE FOR PLNBNG l drilling cycles eae UE ES A z220 Select the desired cycle e g DRILLING The TNC displays the SET STANDARD VALUES soft key if there is a global parameter for it Ea VALUES SET Press the SET STANDARD VALUES soft key The TNC STANDARD i i VALUES enters the word PREDEF predefined in the cycle definition You have now created a link to the corresponding GLOBAL DEF parameter that you defined at the beginning of the program Danger of collision Please note that later changes to the program settings affect the entire machining program and can therefore change the machining procedure significantly If you enter a fixed value in a canned cycle then this value will not be changed by the GLOBAL DEF functions HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 51 2 2
4. time the TNC overwrites the tool radius R in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DR O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured radius with the tool radius R that is stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DR The deviation can also be used for Q parameter Q116 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool radius tolerance for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool format status L in TOOL T m x 2 3 2 D gt D D O m 5 D a O za D 5 Q 3 D D T g 5 ot S D 2 lt Q D et D ek gt D 5 a m D lt 5 or gt D o er D a a 5 O OI a L gt Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn RTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken RBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC aut
5. 120 Please note while programming 121 Cycle parameters 122 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 DIN ISO G265 124 Cycle run 124 Please note while programming 125 Cycle parameters 126 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 DIN ISO G267 128 Cycle run 128 Please note while programming 129 Cycle parameters 130 4 11 Programming examples 1932 20 5 1 Fundamentals 136 Overview 136 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO G251 137 Cycle run 137 Please note while programming 138 Cycle parameters 139 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 252 DIN ISO G252 142 Cycle run 142 Please note while programming 143 Cycle parameters 144 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253 DIN ISO G253 146 Cycle run 146 Please note while programming 147 Cycle parameters 148 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO G254 151 Cycle run 151 Please note while programming 152 Cycle parameters 153 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 DIN ISO G256 156 Cycle run 156 Please note while programming 157 Cycle parameters 158 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 257 DIN ISO G257 160 Cycle run 160 Please note while programming 161 Cycle parameters 162 5 8 Programming examples 164 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 21 il 6 1 Fundamentals 168 Overview
6. 168 6 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 DIN ISO G220 169 Cycle run 169 Please note while programming 169 Cycle parameters 170 6 3 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 DIN ISO G221 172 Cycle run 172 Please note while programming 172 Cycle parameters 173 6 4 Programming examples 174 22 7 1 SL Cycles 178 Fundamentals 178 Overview 180 7 2 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 DIN ISO G37 181 Please note while programming 181 Cycle parameters 181 7 3 Overlapping contours 182 Fundamentals 182 Subprograms overlapping pockets 183 Area of inclusion 184 Area of exclusion 185 Area of intersection 185 7 4 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 DIN ISO G120 186 Please note while programming 186 Cycle parameters 187 7 5 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 DIN ISO G121 188 Cycle run 188 Please note while programming 188 Cycle parameters 189 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 190 Cycle run 190 Please note while programming 191 Cycle parameters 192 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 DIN ISO G123 194 Cycle run 194 Please note while programming 194 Cycle parameters 194 7 8 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 DIN ISO G124 195 Cycle run 195 Please note while programming 195 Cycle parameters 196 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 DIN ISO G125
7. You can list up to 12 subprograms Subcontours in Cycle 14 Cycle parameters 14 Label numbers for the contour Enter all label Hes bat numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be superimposed to define the contour Confirm every label number with the ENT key When you have entered all numbers conclude entry with the END key Entry of up to 12 subprogram numbers 1 to 254 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G37 le 14 DIN ISO gt am LL O LL O as O lt O Q A j il Mb vertapping contours 7 3 Overlapping contours Fundamentals Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island 182 Example NC blocks Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Subprograms overlapping pockets subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR The subsequent programming examples are contour GEOMETRY in a main program Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S4 and S5 They do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles Subprogram 1 Pocket A ep o 5 a ta D 3 N J O or 00 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 U ai contours o i Mb vertapping contours ep p h h O O D D w gt Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area E T
8. gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Path overlap factor 0370 0370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle Gi in o i 5 8 Progra ino examples 5 8 Programming examples Definition of workpiece blank Define the tool for roughing finishing Define slotting mill Call the tool for roughing finishing Retract the tool 64 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 8 CYCL CALL POS X 50 Y 50 Z 0 M3 9 CYCL DEF 252 CIRCULAR POCKET Q215 0 sMACHINING OPERATION Q223 50 CIRCLE DIAMETER Q368 0 2 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q207 500 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q201 30 DEPTH Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q369 0 1 ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLUNGING Q338 5 INFEED FOR FINISHING Q200 2 sSETUP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SETUP CLEARANCE Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP Q366 1 PLUNGE Q385 750 FEED RATE FOR FINISHING Call cycle for machining the contour outside Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 7 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STU
9. 9 1 SL Cycles Selecting a program with contour definitions With the SEL CONTOUR function you select a program with contour definitions from which the TNC takes the contour descriptions Show the soft key row with special functions FCT e Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining SEL Press the SEL CONTOUR soft key Enter the full name of the program with the contour definition and confirm with the END key 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY is no longer necessary if you use SEL Program a SEL CONTOUR block before the SL cycles Cycle CONTUR Defining contour descriptions With the DECLARE CONTOUR function you enter in a program the path for programs from which the TNC draws the contour descriptions In addition you can select a separate depth for this contour description FCL 2 function Show the soft key row with special functions FCT conTouR Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining DECLARE Press the DECLARE CONTOUR soft key Enter the number for the contour designator QC and confirm with the ENT key Enter the full name of the program with the contour description and confirm with the END key or if desired Define a separate depth for the selected contour With the given contour designators QC you can Include the various contours in the contour formula If you program separate depths for contours then you must assign a depth to all subcontours as
10. As a rule the TNC moves without radius compensation RO to the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block If you use CYCL CALL POS to call a cycle in which a start position is defined for example Cycle 212 then the position defined in the cycles serves as an additional shift to the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block You should therefore always define the start position to be set in the cycle as 0 Calling a cycle with M99 89 The M99 function which is active only in the block in which it is programmed calls the last defined canned cycle once You can program M99 at the end of a positioning block The TNC moves to this position and then calls the last defined canned cycle If the TNC is to execute the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the first cycle call with M89 depending on MP 7440 To cancel the effect of M89 program M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last starting point or Define with CYCL DEF a new canned cycle 48 Using Canned Cycles il Working with the secondary axes U V W The TNC performs infeed movements in the axis that was defined in the TOOL CALL block as the spindle axis It performs movements in the working plane only in the principal axes X Y or Z Exceptions You program secondary axes for the side lengths in Cycles 3 SLOT MILLING and 4 POCKET MILLING You program secondary axes in the first block of the contour geometry subprogram of an
11. Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 205 A Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Decrement Q212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range O to 99999 9999 Upper advanced stop distance Q258 incremental Setup clearance for rapid traverse positioning
12. Feed rate F Traverse speed of the rotary axis during automatic positioning Input range 0 to 99999 999 Setup clearance incremental The TNC positions the tilting head so that the position that results from the extension of the tool by the setup clearance does not change relative to the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Resetting To cancel the tilt angle redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and enter an angular value of 0 for all axes of rotation You must then program the WORKING PLANE cycle once again by answering the dialog question with the NO ENT key to disable the function HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyo DIN ISO i il G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyl DIN ISO Position the axis of rotation positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether they must be positioned manually in the program Refer to your machine manual A The machine tool builder determines whether Cycle 19 Manual positioning of rotary axes If the rotary axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 19 you must position them in a separate L block after the cycle definition If you use axis angles you can define the axis values right in the L block If you use spatial angles then use the Q parameters Q120 A axis value 0121 B axis value and 0122 C axis value which are described by Cycle 19 Example NC blocks For manual positioning always use the rota
13. 0 one helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by Q355 multiplied by the pitch Input range 0 to 99999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Q355 gt 1 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the stud center Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alt
14. 20 FPOL X 30 Y 30 21 FC DR R20 CCPR 55 CCPA 60 22 FSELECT 2 23 FL AN 120 PDX 30 PDY 30 D10 24 FSELECT 3 25 FC X 0 DR R30 CCX 30 CCY 30 26 FSELECT 2 27 LBL 0 28 END PGM C20 MM 202 Cycle definition Coarse roughing Cycle call Coarse roughing Tool change Tool call fine roughing tool diameter 15 Define the fine roughing cycle Cycle call Fine roughing Retract in the tool axis end program Contour subprogram Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il les HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 rogramming examp Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Drill diameter 12 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters i i Cycle definition Pilot drilling les Cycle call Pilot drilling Tool change gramming examp Call the tool for roughing finishing diameter 12 Cycle definition Rough out q q N Cycle call Rough out Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program N 04 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Contour subprogram 1 left pocket Contour subprogram 2 right pocket Contour subprogram 3 square left island Contour subprogram 4 triangular right island les Ogramming examp j i 7 11 ME amming examples N Definition of work
15. 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN a i 25 DIN ISO i il G125 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN file 25 DIN ISO Cycle parameters gt Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between Example NC blocks workpiece surface and contour floor Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Ob absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q7 absolute Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for tool retraction at the end of the cycle Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Climb or up cut Up cut 1 Q15 Climb milling Inout value 1 Up cut milling Input value 1 To enable climb milling and up cut milling alternately in several infeeds Input value 0 198 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il 7 10 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA Cycle 27
16. Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane Only effective if Q367 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane Only effective if Q367 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting angle Q376 absolute Enter the polar angle of the starting point Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Angular length Q248 incremental Enter the angular length of the slot Inout range O to 360 000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G254 OQ 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 25 k il G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 154 Angle increment 0378 incremental Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation is at the center of the pitch circle Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Number of repetitions Q377 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle Input range 1 to 99999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input rang
17. HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 4 5 Fundamentals of i i milling 4 5 Fundamentals of thread milling 112 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Before the helical approach a compensating motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the programmed starting plane for the thread path Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous movement After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G262 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 _ b il 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 Please note while programming 114 Canned Cycles Tapping Threa
18. Universal pecking Tapping with a floating tap holder new Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Circular point pattern Linear point pattern Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Single fluted deep hole drilling Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete machining Circular pocket complete machining Key way milling Circular slot Rectangular stud complete machining Circular stud complete machining Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Contour train data Page 83 Page 87 Page 103 Page 105 Page 91 Page 108 Page 169 Page 172 Page 245 Page 247 Page 251 Page 69 Page 94 Page 269 Page 137 Page 142 Page 146 Page 151 Page 156 Page 160 Page 113 Page 116 Page 120 Page 124 Page 128 Page 199 Touch Probe Cycles 0 oOo BR O 31 32 33 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 Reference plane Polar datum Calibrate TS radius Measuring Measuring in 3 D Calibrate TS length Calibrating the TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool radius Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Basic rotation using two points Basic rotation from two holes Basic rotation from two studs Compensate misalignment with rotary axis Set basic rotation Compensate misalignment with the C axis Ref
19. 197 Cycle run 197 Please note while programming 197 Cycle parameters 198 7 10 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA Cycle 270 DIN ISO G270 199 Please note while programming 199 Cycle parameters 200 7 11 Programming examples 201 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 8 1 Fundamentals 210 Overview of cylindrical surface cycles 210 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN ISO G127 software option 1 211 Execution of cycle 211 Please note while programming 212 Cycle parameters 213 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle 28 DIN ISO G128 software option 1 214 Cycle run 214 Please note while programming 215 Cycle parameters 216 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Cycle 29 DIN ISO G129 software option 1 217 Cycle run 217 Please note while programming 218 Cycle parameters 219 8 5 CYLINDER SURFACE outside contour milling Cycle 39 DIN ISO G139 software option 1 220 Cycle run 220 Please note while programming 221 Cycle parameters 222 8 6 Programming Examples 223 24 9 1 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula 228 Fundamentals 228 Selecting a program with contour definitions 230 Defining contour descriptions 230 Entering a complex contour formula 231 Overlapping contours 232 Contour machining with SL Cycles 234 9 2 SL Cycles with Simple Contour Formula 238 Fun
20. 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO parameters _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis 0154 Actual value of length in the reference axis Q155 Actual value of length in the minor axis Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q164 Deviation of side length in reference axis Q165 Deviation of side length in minor axis HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 403 il Please note while programming G423 tool call to define the touch probe axis Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points Cycle parameters a23 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the ean pocket in the reference axis of the w
21. 4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last traversed Z value 5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in the direction of point 4 to the next line 6 From this point the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a movement in the direction of point 3 7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned above the highest programmed point in the spindle axis offset by the tool diameter HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G231 10 4 RULED a Cycle 231 DIN ISO C il G231 10 4 RULED a Cycle 231 DIN ISO Cutting motion The starting point and therefore the milling direction is selectable because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the total movement from point 1 2 to point 3 4 You can program point 1 at any corner of the surface to be machined If you are using an end mill for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following ways A shaping cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for slightly inclined surfaces A drawing cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than Sspindle axis coordinate of point 2 for steep surfaces When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 parallel to the direction of the st
22. After running Cycle 450 the TNC creates a measuring log TCHPR450 TXT containing the following information Creation date and time of the log Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run Mode used 0 Save 1 Restore 2 Saving status Number of the memory space 0 to 9 Line number of the kinematics configuration in the kinematic table Code number if you entered one immediately before running Cycle 450 The other data in the log vary depending on the selected mode Mode 0 Logging of all axis entries and transformation entries of the kinematics chain that the TNC has saved Mode 1 Logging of all transformation entries before and after restoring the kinematics configuration Mode 2 List with the current saving status on the screen and in the log including the number of the memory space code numbers kinematics numbers and date of saving HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G450 option SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO S il G451 option mo ee KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 18 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 option Cycle run The touch probe cycle 451 enables you to check and if required optimize the kinematics of your machine Use the 3 D TS touch probe to measure a HEIDENHAIN calibration ball that you have attached to the machine table calibration balls KKH 250 ID number 655 475 01 or KKH 100 ID number 655 475 02 which have high rigidity and are designed especia
23. Call tool drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F Cycle definition drilling O must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract the tool change the tool Tool call for tap Move tool to clearance height Cycle definition for tapping O must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract in the tool axis end program examples 4 11 Programming k i Point table TAB1 PNT T 2 Q x 34 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il arn V 5 1 Fundamentals E Overview The TNC offers 6 cycles for machining pockets studs and slots SG Ode Soft oy Pase 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET 251 Page 137 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of kim am machining operation and helical plunging 252 CIRCULAR POCKET 252 Page 142 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of jm machining operation and helical plunging 253 SLOT MILLING z253 Page 146 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of fim machining operation and reciprocal plunging 254 CIRCULAR SLOT 254 Page 151 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of sa machining operation and reciprocal plunging 256 RECTANGULAR
24. Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Measuring axis 1 3 l reference axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis MP6140 Q320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traverse direction Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction gt Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinate If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the probed surface Input range 0 to 2999 New datum 0333 absolute Coordinate at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt M
25. Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 Is active 0 Move between operations on a straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle m X D 3 O T e zA A EAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO q 402 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 7 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO G423 G423 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 423 finds the center length and width of a rectangular pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360
26. No function No function No function No function Activate new preset with Cycle 247 Part program call G419 i i 2 16 1 Fundamentals a amp Overview The TNC offers twelve cycles for measuring workpieces automatically oO c oa ee LL O REFERENCE PLANE Measuring a o Page 390 coordinate in a selectable axis Las ka 1 POLAR DATUM PLANE Measuring a 1 PA Page 391 Tm point in a probing direction oh 420 MEASURE ANGLE Measuring an a20 Page 392 angle in the working plane h 421 MEASURE HOLE Measuring the a21 Page 395 position and diameter of a hole KJ 422 MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE a22 Page 399 Measuring the position and diameter of ei a circular stud 423 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Measuring ma Page 403 the position length and width of a ami rectangular pocket 424 MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE aza Page 407 Measuring the position length and width of a rectangular stud 425 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH 2nd a25 Page 411 soft key row Measuring slot width By 426 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH 2nd soft m Page 414 key row Measuring the width of a ridge Z 427 MEASURE COORDINATE 2nd soft m Page 417 key row Measuring any coordinate ina a selectable axis 430 MEAS BOLT HOLE CIRC 2nd soft f Page 420 key row Measuring position and diameter of a bolt hole circle 431 MEASURE PLANE 2nd soft key a31 Page 424 row Measuring the A and B axis angles HA of a plane 384 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Record
27. Special Functions il 12 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO G04 Function This causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed DWELL TIME A dwell time can be used for such purposes as chip breaking The cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Cycle parameters Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in seconds Input range O to 3600 s 1 hour in steps of 0 001 seconds HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G04 77 HEIDENHAIN S40 AS VA lt VAN Example NC blocks DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO G39 12 3 M cram CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO 12 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO G39 Cycle function Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles Please note while programming disk of your TNC If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you need only to enter the program name The program you are calling must be stored on the hard If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling It trom you must enter the complete path for example TNC KLAR35 FK1 50 H If you want to define an ISO program to be a cycle enter t
28. TNC is to interrupt program run and display the measurement results on the screen after a measuring cycle for automatic workpiece measurement 0 Never interrupt the program run not even if the output of the measurement results on the screen is selected in the respective probing cycle 1 Always interrupt program run and display the measurement results on the screen To continue the program run press the NC Start button 17 7 y PROBING Cycle 441 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 445 il ATAL j 5 i T 4 i Y e q P Ni 1 1 4 b pra q i 3 5 i h 7 i ad D 4 l K 4 j es ne 18 1 Kinematic Measurement with TS Touch Probes Option KinematicsOpt Fundamentals Accuracy requirements are becoming increasingly stringent particularly in the area of b axis machining Complex parts are required to be manufactured with precision and reproducible accuracy even over long periods Some of the reasons for inaccuracy in multi axis machining are deviations between the kinematic model saved in the control see figure 1 at right and the kinematic conditions actually existing on the machine see figure 2 at right When the rotary axes are positioned these deviations cause inaccuracy of the workpiece see figure 3 at right It is therefore necessary for the model to approach reality as closely as possible The new TNC function KinematicsOpt is an important component that helps you to really fulfill
29. The TNC takes the dimensions of the workpiece blank the finished dimension and the permitted stepover into account This process is repeated until the defined finished dimension has been reached The tool then tangentially departs the contour on a semicircle and returns to the starting point for the stud machining The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth and machines the stud at this depth This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth is reached 156 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle zanso G256 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 157 il G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle Cycle parameters 158 First side length Q218 Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank side length 1 0424 Length of the stud blank parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 1 greater than First side length The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between blank dimension 1 and finished dimension 1 is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range O to 99999 9999 Second side length Q219 Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 2 greater than Second side lengt
30. Tool position Center of slot 1 Tool position Left end of slot 2 Tool position Center of left slot circle 3 Tool position Center of right slot circle 4 Tool position Right end of slot Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor 0369 incremental Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle ate i il G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle See 150 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q2
31. Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the stud center Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 0303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC shoul
32. full sequence Programming and editing Starting point in X 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 0 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 40 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 52500 4 L Z 100 RO FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF PAT1 5 END PGM PLANE MM 1 gt Pac A INFO 17 3 54 A felt A AS ea i Jc FS 59 EF LLI E a INITION 2 3 Pattern Def EF LLI E A INITION 2 3 Pattern Def Defining individual frames FRAME 60 If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of the entire pattern Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the frame in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the frame in the Y axis Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value Spacing of machining positions Y incremental Distance between the machining positions in the Y direction You can enter a positive or negative value Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle o
33. gt 1st meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute g et Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference ees axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to y 99999 9999 gt Ist meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 1st meas point 3rd axis 0294 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 X is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 0263 alternatively PREDEF Q264 gt Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinate If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the probed surface Input range 0 to 2999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Measured value transfer 0 1 0303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table
34. negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G413 15 7 DATUM _ OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO j il G413 15 7 DATUM FRAM ouTsinE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO 354 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the st
35. restored Programming in inches The TNC always records the log data and results of measurement in millimeters Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Cycle parameters gt Mode 0 Check 1 Measure O406 Specify whether the TNC should check or optimize the active kinematics 0 Check the active machine kinematics The TNC measures the kinematics in the axes you have defined but it does not make any changes to it The TNC displays the results of measurement in a measurement log 1 Optimize the active machine kinematics The TNC measures and optimizes the kinematics in the axes you have defined Exact calibration sphere radius 0407 Enter the exact radius of the calibrating ball used Input range 0 0001 to 99 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Retraction height 0408 absolute Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 E Input 0 Do not move to any retraction height The TNC moves to the next measuring position in the axis to be measured Not allowed for Hirth axes The TNC moves to the first measuring position in the series A then B then C E Input gt 0 Retraction height in the untilted workpiece coordinate system to which the TNC positions before a rotary axis positioning in the spindle axis Also the TNC moves the touch probe in the working plane to the datum
36. 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO Example NC blocks gt 5 TCH PROBE 417 DATUM IN TS AXIS Q263 25 51ST POINT IST AXIS lt m Q264 25 1ST POINT 2ND AXIS Q294 25 1ST POINT 3RD AXIS a 03200 SETUP CLEARANCE LO Q260 50 CLEARANCE HEIGHT 3050 HO IN TABLE 0333540 DATUM 0303 1 MEAS VALUE TRANSFER 370 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO G418 G418 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 418 calculates the intersection of the lines connecting opposite holes and sets the datum at the intersection If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or preset table Y 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns t
37. 15 7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 413 finds the center of a circular stud and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters 0303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of center in
38. 2nd setup clearance 209 TAPPING W CHIP BREAKING zos Without a floating tap holder with 22 automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance chip breaking Page 108 wo a 4 262 THREAD MILLING 252 Page 113 Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled 22 material 263 THREAD MILLING CNTSNKG 253 Page 116 Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled D material and machining a countersunk chamfer 264 THREAD DRILLING MILLING 254 Page 120 Cycle for drilling into the solid material AD with subsequent milling of the thread with a tool 265 HEL THREAD DRILLING MILLING 255 Page 124 Cycle for milling the thread into the solid aD material 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG Page 124 Cycle for milling an external thread and im machining a countersunk chamfer 102 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 DIN ISO G206 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool Is retracted to the setup clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX 4 Atthe setup clearance the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again Please note while programming Prog
39. 3 Traversing speed of the tool during plunging in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO Feed rate for plunging 4 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO Miscellaneous function M Optional entry of one to two miscellaneous functions for example M13 Input range 0 to 999 DATA Cycle 30 DIN ISO cc N q Example NC blocks 244 Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 3 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 DIN ISO G230 Cycle run 1 From the current position in the working plane the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward The tool then moves at FMAX in the tool axis to the setup clearance From there It approaches the programmed starting position in the tool axis at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves at the programmed feed rate for milling to the end point 2 The TNC calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the program length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the stepover feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width and the number of cuts The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the cycle the t
40. 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G412 INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO TE lt q O T j il G412 15 6 DATUM Aen INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 350 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Datum number in table Q305 Ent
41. 421 Measuring log for Probing Cycle 421 Hole Measuring Date 30 06 2005 Time 6 55 04 Measuring program TNCAGEH35712 CHECK1 H Nominal values Center in reference axis 50 0000 Center in minor axis 65 0000 Diameter 12 0000 Given limit values Maximum dimension for center in reference axis 50 1000 Minimum limit for center in reference axis 49 9000 Maximum limit for center in minor axis 65 1000 Minimum limit for center in minor axis 64 9000 Maximum dimension for hole 12 0450 Minimum dimension for hole 12 0000 Actual values Center in reference axis 50 0810 Center in minor axis 64 9530 Diameter 12 0259 Deviations Center in reference axis 0 0810 Center in minor axis 0 0470 Diameter 0 0259 Further measuring results Measuring height 5 0000 End of measuring log 386 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measurement results in Q parameters N The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch Manual Programming and editing probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160 vm _ Measuring height in probe axis T Deviations from the nominal value are saved in the parameters Q161 mk Form o i z xo vso z ao to Q166 Note the table of result parameters that are listed with every 4 L Zatoa RA FHK oo cycle description Ea r During cycle definition the TNC also shows the result parameters for e the respective cycle in a help graphic see figure at uppe
42. 5 or gt D o er D a a 5 O OI a L gt Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn LTOL or and RTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken LBREAK or and RBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from MP6540 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF mi x lt 3 D lt O 2a e O V 5 gt D g h fet an Cutter measurement 0 No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth Measuring tool length and radius Cycle 33 or 483 ISO 490 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Symbole 3 D touch probes 40 300 Calibrating Triggering 435 436 A Angle of a plane measuring 424 Angle measuring in a plane 424 Automatic presetting 330 Center of 4 holes 371
43. Center of bolt hole circle 365 Center of circular pocket or hole 348 Center of circular stud 352 Center of rectangular pocket 340 Center of rectangular stud 344 In any axis 375 In inside corner 361 In the touch probe axis 369 Outside corner 356 Ridge center 337 Slot center 333 Automatic tool measurement 481 Axis specific scaling 276 B Back boring 83 Basic rotation Measuring during program run 308 Setting directly 322 Bolt hole circle 169 Bolt hole circle measuring 420 Bore milling 91 Boring 75 C Centering 69 Circle measuring from inside 395 Circle measuring from outside 399 Circular pocket Roughing finishing 142 Circular slot Roughing finishing 151 Circular stud 160 Classification of results 387 Compensating workpiece misalignment By measuring two points of a line 310 Over two holes 313 Over two studs 316 Via rotary axis 319 323 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 C Confidence range 304 Contour cycles 178 Contour train 197 Contour train data 199 Coordinate transformation 260 Coordinate measuring a single 417 Cycle Calling 46 Defining 45 Cycles and point tables 66 Cylinder surface Contour machining 211 Contour milling 220 Ridge machining 217 Slot machining 214 D Datum shift With datum tables 263 Within the program 262 Dee
44. DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SETUP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 sDWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SETUP CLEARANCE Q211 0 2 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH 12 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 13 L Z 100 RO FMAX 14 TOOL CALL 3 Z 200 15 L Z 50 RO FMAX 16 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW Q200 2 sSETUP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH OF THREAD Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 3 2ND SETUP CLEARANCE 17 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 18 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 19 END PGM 1 MM 100 Cycle definition CENTERING Call the cycle in connection with point pattern Retract the tool change the tool Call the drilling tool radius 2 4 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F Cycle definition drilling Call the cycle in connection with point pattern Retract the tool Call the tapping tool radius 3 Move tool to clearance height Cycle definition for tapping Call the cycle in connection with point pattern Retract in the tool axis end program Canned Cycles Drilling il 4 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers 8 cycles for all types of threading operations 206 TAPPING NEW 206 Page 103 With a floating tap holder with automatic AD pre positioning 2nd setup clearance a er 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW 207 RT Page 105 Without a floating tap holder with AD automatic pre positioning
45. DIN ISO 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 DIN ISO G80 software option 1 Effect In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane i e the position of the tool axis referenced to the machine coordinate system by entering tilt angles There are two ways to determine the position of the working plane Enter the position of the rotary axes directly Describe the position of the working plane using up to 3 rotations spatial angle of the fixed machine coordinate system The required spatial angle can be calculated by cutting a perpendicular line through the tilted working plane and considering It from the axis around which you wish to tilt With two spatial angles every tool position in space can be defined exactly therefore also all movements in the tilted system are Note that the position of the tilted coordinate system and dependent on your description of the tilted plane If you program the position of the working plane via spatial angles the TNC will calculate the required angle positions of the tilted axes automatically and will store these in the parameters Q120 A axis to Q122 C axis If two solutions are possible the TNC will choose the shorter path from the zero position of the rotary axes The axes are always rotated in the same sequence for calculating the tilt of the plane The TNC first rotates the A axis then the B axis and finally the C axis Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as it is defined
46. ISO G418 371 Cycle run 371 Please note while programming 372 Cycle parameters 372 15 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 375 Cycle run 375 Please note while programming 375 Cycle parameters 376 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 16 1 Fundamentals 384 Overview 384 Recording the results of measurement 385 Measurement results in Q parameters 387 Classification of results 387 Tolerance monitoring 388 Tool monitoring 388 Reference system for measurement results 389 16 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO G55 390 Cycle run 390 Please note while programming 390 Cycle parameters 390 16 3 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 DIN ISO 391 Cycle run 391 Please note while programming 391 Cycle parameters 391 16 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO G420 392 Cycle run 392 Please note while programming 392 Cycle parameters 393 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 395 Cycle run 395 Please note while programming 395 Cycle parameters 396 16 6 MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 399 Cycle run 399 Please note while programming 399 Cycle parameters 400 16 7 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO G423 403 Cycle run 403 Please note while programming 404 Cycle parameters 404 16 8 MEAS RECTAN OU
47. Inout range O to 99999 9999 Max path overlap factor 0370 Maximum stepover factor k The TNC calculates the actual stepover from the second side length Q219 and the tool radius so that a constant stepover is used for machining If you have entered a radius R2 in the tool table e g tooth radius when using a face milling cutter the TNC reduces the stepover accordingly Inout range 0 1 to 1 9999 alternatively PREDEF Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling the last infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when approaching the Starting position and when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely to the material Q389 1 the TNC moves the tool at the feed rate for milling Q207 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance Example NC blocks between tool tip and the starting position in the tool axis If you are milling with machining strategy O389 2 the TNC moves the tool at the setup clearance over the current plunging depth to the starting point of the next pass Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF
48. Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Total hole depth 0356 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Inout range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Upper advanced stop distance 0258 incremental Setup clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole Input range O to 99999 9999 Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 incremental Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking No chip breaking if O is entered Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip a
49. LL LL lt LL Q O el Y LO pm HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 335 il G408 FCL 3 function m X D 3 O T e zA A F PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO m lt LL Q O el Y X LO q 336 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 3 RIDGE CENTER REF PT T Cy
50. Program Defaults for ea Global data valid everywhere Setup clearance Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface for automated approach of the cycle start position in the tool axis 2nd set up clearance Position to which the TNC positions the tool at the end of a machining step The next machining position is approached at this height in the machining plane F positioning Feed rate at which the TNC traverses the tool within a cycle F retraction Feed rate at which the TNC retracts the tool The parameters are valid for all canned cycles with numbers greater than 2xx Global data for drilling operations Retraction rate for chip breaking Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Dwell time at depth Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Dwell time at top lime in seconds that the tool remains at the setup clearance 2 2 Program Defaults for Pies The parameters apply to the drilling tapping and thread milling cycles 200 to 209 240 and 262 to 267 52 Using Canned Cycles il Global data for milling operations with pocket cycles 25x Overlap factor The tool radius multiplied by the overlap factor equals the lateral stepover Climb or up cut Select the type of milling Plunging type Plunge into the material helically in a reciprocating motion or vertically The parameters apply to milling cycles 251 to 257 Global data for milling operations with con
51. Reference angle basic rotation for measuring the measuring points in the active workpiece coordinate system Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge the measuring range of an axis Input range O to 360 0000 m x D 3 pcs O D o D mp 2 5 xe e D 3 ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO 00 q HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 469 il Start angle A axis 0411 absolute Starting angle in the A axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle A axis 0412 absolute Ending angle in the A axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid A axis 0413 Angle of incidence in the A axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 G452 option Number meas points A axis 0414 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the A axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Inout range O to 12 Start angle B axis 0415 absolute Starting angle in the B axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle B axis 0416 absolute Ending angle in the B axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid in B axis 0417 Angle of incidence in the B axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 35
52. SL cycle In Cycles 5 CIRCULAR POCKET 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET 252 CIRCULAR POCKET 253 SLOT and 254 CIRCULAR SLOT the TNC machines the cycle in the axes that you programmed in the last positioning block before the cycle call When tool axis Z is active the following combinations are permissible X Y X V U Y U V HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 2 1 Working with Canned sa 2 2 Program Defaults for Pies 2 2 Program Defaults for Cycles Overview All Cycles 20 to 25 as well as all of those with numbers 200 or higher always use identical cycle parameters such as the setup clearance Q200 which you must enter for each cycle definition The GLOBAL DEF function gives you the possibility of defining these cycle parameters once at the beginning of the program so that they are effective globally for all canned cycles used in the program In the respective canned cycle you then simply link to the value defined at the beginning of the program The following GLOBAL DEF functions are available GLOBAL DEF COMMON Loe Page 52 Definition of generally valid cycle GENERAL parameters GLOBAL DEF DRILLING cont oer Page 52 Definition of specific drilling cycle DRILLING parameters GLOBAL DEF POCKET MILLING oit oer Page 53 Definition of specific pocket milling cycle Pockr muns parameters GLOBAL DEF CONTOUR MILLING ee Page 53 Definition of specific contour milling CNTR MLLNG parameters GLOBAL DEF POSITIONING 125 Page 53 GLOBA
53. TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 8 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 11 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 12 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance 120 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Digso G264 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 121 il G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Mso Cycle parameters 264 122 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread
54. The probe monitoring is not active in this mode Define the positioning velocity in parameter Q253 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool during positioning in mm min Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF gt Reference angle Q380 absolute Reference angle basic rotation for measuring the measuring points in the active workpiece coordinate system Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge the measuring range of an axis Input range O to 360 0000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m x D 3 pcs O D o D mp 2 5 xe e D 3 46 a G451 option _ KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO g Start angle A axis 0411 absolute Starting angle in the A axis at which the first measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 a End angle A axis 0412 absolute Ending angle in the o A axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 q LO Angle of incid A axis 0413 Angle of incidence in F the A axis at which the other rotary axes are to be g measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points A axis 0414 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the A axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Inout range O to 12 Start angle B axis 0415 absolute Starting angle in the B axis at which the first measurement Is to
55. a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length 0323 incremental Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Inout range O to 99999 9999 2nd side length 03724 incremental Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G410 15 4 DATUM a ae OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO G410 15 4 DATUM OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO 342 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring p
56. a number is entered maximum 16 characters if a name is entered Reciprocation feed rate Q19 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during reciprocating plung cut Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ 7 6 ROUGH OUT ae 22 DIN ISO v gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q12 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF 192 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Feed rate factor in 0401 Percentage factor by which the TNC reduces the machining feed rate Q12 as soon as the tool moves within the material over its entire circumference during roughing If you use the feed rate reduction then you can define the feed rate for roughing so large that there are optimum cutting conditions with the path overlap Q2 specified in Cycle 20 The TNC then reduces the feed rate as per your definition at transitions and narrow places so the machining time should be reduced in total Input range 0 0001 to 100 0000 Fine roughing strategy 0404 Specify how the TNC should move the tool during fine roughing when the radius of the fine roughing tool is larger than half the coarse roughing tool 0404 0 Move the tool along the contour at the current depth between areas that need to be fine roughed 0404 1 Between areas that need to be fine roughed retract the to
57. and 2 2 After the TNC has saved the position the touch probe stops The TNC saves the X Y Z coordinates of the probe tip center without calculation of the calibration data in three successive O parameters You define the number of the first parameter in the cycle 3 Finally the TNC moves the touch probe back by that value against the probing direction that you defined in the parameter MB Please note while programming The TNC retracts the touch probe by no more than the retraction distance MB and does not pass the starting point of the measurement This rules out any collision during retraction Remember that the TNC always writes to 4 successive Q parameters If the TNC could not determine a valid touch point the fourth result parameter will have the value 1 The TNC saves the measured values without calculating the calibration data of the touch probe With function FN17 SYSWRITE ID 990 NR 6 you can set whether the cycle runs through the probe input X12 or Klee HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 17 55 MEASURING IN 3 D Cycle 4 FCL 3 function il 17 5 MEASURING IN 3 D Cycle 4 FCL 3 function Cycle parameters nem SS 440 Parameter number for result Enter the number of the Q parameter to which you want the TNC to assign the first coordinate X Input range O to 1999 Relative measuring path in X X component of the direction vector defining the direction in which the touch probe is to move Inpu
58. and in a log file There are 10 memory spaces available numbers O to 9 Please note while programming 450 Always save the active kinematics configuration before running a kinematics optimization Advantage You can restore the old data if you are not satisfied with the results or if errors occur during optimization e g power failure Save mode In addition to the kinematic configuration the TNC always saves the code number freely definable last entered under MOD Then you cannot overwrite this memory space unless you enter this code number If you have saved a kinematic configuration without a code number the TNC automatically overwrites this memory space during the next saving process Restore mode The TNC must restore saved data only to a matching kinematic configuration Restore mode Note that a change in the kinematics always changes the preset as well Set the preset again if necessary Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Cycle parameters aso Mode 0 1 2 0410 Specify whether to save or restore a kinematics configuration 0 Save active kinematics 1 Restore previously saved kinematics configuration 2 Display the saving status Memory 0 9 0409 Number of the memory space to which you want to save the entire kinematics configuration or the number of the memory space from which you want to restore it Input range 0 to 9 no function if mode 2 is selected Log function
59. approached tangentially 6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside out The pocket floor is approached tangentially HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle Gh ii o il G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO Please note while programming 138 With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation R0 Note Parameter Q367 pocket position The TNC runs the cycle in the axes machining plane with which you approached the starting position For example in Xand Y if you programmed CYCL CALL POS X Y or in U and V if you programmed CYCL CALL POS U V The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note Parameter Q204 2nd setup clearance The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting position At the end of a roughing operation the TNC positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid traverse The tool is above the current pecking depth by the setup clearance Enter the setup clearance so that the tool cannot jam because of chips Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error m
60. at front 2 f countersinking is before thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front If countersinking occurs after thread milling the TNC moves the tool to the countersinking depth at the feed rate for prepositioning 3 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 4 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 5 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread 6 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement 7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it reaches the thread depth 8 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 9 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance 124 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 bijjjso G265 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 125 il G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 Mso Cycle parameters 265 126 Nominal diameter Q335 Nominal thread diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic
61. axis the machining direction is 270 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters G28 g gt Mirrored axis Enter the axis to be mirrored You Example NC blocks can mirror all axes including rotary axes except for the spindle axis and its auxiliary axes You can enter 79 CYCL DEF 8 0 MIRROR IMAGE up to three axes Input range Up to three NC axes X 80 CYCL DEF 8 1 X YU 22 Y Z U V W A B C O A Z O co a O gt 2 LLI g lt as 11 5 M HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 271 il G73 1 WROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO 11 6 ROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO G73 Effect The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in the working plane within a program The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active rotation angle is shown in the additional status display Reference axis for the rotation angle X Y plane X axis Y Z plane Y axis Z X plane Z axis Resetting Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of 0 Please note while programming Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed if An active radius compensation is canceled by defining necessary After defining Cycle 10 you must move both axes of the working plane to activate rotation for all axes 272 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters Rotatio
62. by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers iITNC 530 340 490 05 iITNC 530 E 340 491 05 iITNC 530 340 492 05 iITNC 530 E 340 493 05 ITNC 530 programming station 340 494 05 The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC The export version of the TNC has the following limitations Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Tool measurement with the TT Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users User s Manual All TNC functions that have no connection with cycles are described in the User s Manual of the iTNC 530 Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual Conversational Programming User s Manual ID 670 387 xx DIN ISO User s Manual ID 670 391 xx smarT NC user documentation The smarT NC operating mode is described in a separate Pilot Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this Pi
63. cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis 414 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch
64. determine where the tool Is positioned at the end of Cycles 21 to 24 Bit 4 0 At the end of the cycle the TNC first positions the tool in the tool axis at the clearance height Q7 defined in the cycle and then to the position in the working plane at which the tool was located when the cycle was called Bit 4 1 At the end of the cycle the TNC always positions the tool in the tool axis at the clearance height Q7 defined in the cycle Ensure that no collisions can occur during the following positioning movements The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 7 1 SL Cycles i il 7 1 SL Cycles Overview 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY essential 20 CONTOUR DATA essential 21 PILOT DRILLING optional 22 ROUGH OUT essential 23 FLOOR FINISHING optional 24 SIDE FINISHING optional Enhanced cycles Page 197 25 CONTOUR TRAIN 270 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA 180 Page 181 Page 186 Page 188 Page 190 Page 194 Page 195 Page 199 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il 72 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 DIN ISO G37 Please note while programming All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Before programming note the following Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program
65. determined misalignment by rotating the rotary table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the point entered as center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle This touch probe cycle is not allowed when the tilted working plane function is active If you want to compensate the misalignment by rotating the rotary table the TNC will automatically use the following rotary axes C for tool axis Z B for tool axis Y A for tool axis X HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 G401 14 3 BASIC o from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO i il G401 14 3 BASIC ROTAMEN from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 401 314 Ist hole Center in 1st axis Q268 absolute Center o
66. deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the point entered as center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the third hole 3 6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the third hole center 7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following O EAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO parameters _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ _ Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of bolt hole circle diameter Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q163 Deviation of bolt hole circle diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the t
67. dispersion measured standard deviation Optimized dispersion optimized standard deviation Ascertained backlash Averaged positioning error Measuring circle radius Compensation values in all axes Measurement uncertainty of rotary axes Notes on log data Valuation number The valuation number is a measure of the quality of the measuring positions with respect to the changeable transformations of the kinematics model The higher the valuation number the greater the benefit from optimization by the TNC Because the TNC always needs two transformations for measuring the position of a rotary axis two valuation numbers per rotary axis are determined If a complete valuation is missing the position of a rotary axis in the kinematics model is not completely defined The higher the valuation number the greater the benefit from changing the deviations of the measuring points by adjusting the transformation The valuation numbers are independent of the measured errors They are defined by the kinematics model the position and the number of measuring points per rotary axis EASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO The valuation of any rotary axis should not fall below a value of 2 Values greater or equal to 4 are desirable q measurement range of the rotary axis or also the number of measuring points If these measures do not improve the valuation number it may be because of an incorrect kinematic description If necessary inform you
68. in the program As soon as you move an axis in the tilted system the compensation for this specific axis is activated You must move all axes to activate compensation for all axes If you set the function Tilting program run to Active in the Manual Operation mode the angular value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 278 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Please note while programming The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as mathematical angles of a tilted plane Refer to your machine manual Because nonprogrammed rotary axis values are interpreted as unchanged you should always define all three spatial angles even if one or more angles are at zero The working plane is always tilted around the active datum If you use Cycle 19 when M120 is active the TNC automatically rescinds the radius compensation which also rescinds the M120 function Cycle parameters Rotary axis and tilt angle Enter the axes of rotation together with the associated tilt angles The rotary axes A B and C are programmed using soft keys Input range 360 000 to 360 000 If the TNC automatically positions the rotary axes you can enter the following parameters
69. incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Aee A Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Path overlap factor 0370 0370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 alternatively PREDEF Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 vertical plunging The TNC plunges perpendicularly regardless of the plunging angle ANGLE defined in the tool table E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E 2 reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 Otherwise the TNC generates an error message The reciprocation length depends on the plunging angle As a minimum value the TNC uses twice the tool diameter E Alternative PREDEF gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively
70. measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR427 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start G427 gt Maximum limit of size Q288 Maximum permissible measured value Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Minimum limit of size 0289 Minimum permissible measured value Input range O to 99999 9999 gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message O gt Z m N N O gt lt lt A as O O Q LLI as Y lt Lu gt Tool number for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T 16 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 419 il 16 12 MEAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO G430 G430 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 430 finds the center and diameter of a bolt hole circle by probing three holes If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the
71. not measured Optimized standard deviation in the B axis 1 If axis was not measured Optimized standard deviation in the C axis 1 if axis was not measured G451 option D ati KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO j il Positioning direction S The positioning direction of the rotary axis to be measured is O determined from the start angle and the end angle that you define in the cycle A reference measurement is automatically performed at 0 ni The TNC will issue an error message if the selected start angle end angle and number of measuring points result in a measuring position LO of 0 D Specify the start and end angles to ensure that the same position is not measured twice As mentioned above a duplicated point measurement e g measuring positions 90 und 270 is not advisable however it does not cause an error message Example start angle 90 end angle 90 Start angle 90 End angle 90 No of measuring points 4 Angle step resulting from the calculation 90 90 4 1 60 Measuring point 1 90 Measuring point 2 30 Measuring point 3 30 Measuring point 4 90 Example start angle 90 end angle 270 Start angle 90 End angle 270 No of measuring points 4 Angle step resulting from the calculation 270 90 4 1 60 Measuring point 1 90 Measuring point 2 150 Measuring point 3 210 Measuring point 4 270 EASU
72. of rotation lies in the starting point gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur alternatively PREDEF Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the setup clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd setup clearance between machining operations Alternatively PREDEF Example NC blocks 6 3 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 22 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 17 2 6 4 Programming examples Q amp Example Circular hole patterns x Q D 5 pe A S Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling 74 Canned Cycles Pattern Definitions il Define cycle for circular pattern 1 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 0203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 les Q z ra A D 6 4 Progr Define cycle for circular pattern 2 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 0203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Retract in the tool axis end program HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 175 il Canned Cycles Contour
73. of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 2nd axis 0297 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 3rd axis Q298 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q263 Q265 Q296 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR431 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G431 i MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO S i 16 14 Programming examples 16 14 Programming examples Program sequence E Roughing with 0 5 mm finishing allowance Measuring Rectangular stud finis
74. or negative value ts paTTERN DEF gt Stepping angle end angle Incremental polar angle END PON PLANE Hn between two machining positions You can enter a positive or negative value As an alternative you can enter the end angle switch via soft key Number of positions Total number of machining positions on the circle prqenosrs ae gt Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin 2 3 Pattern Def INFO 173 62 Using Canned Cycles 2 4 Point Tables Application You should create a point table whenever you want to run a cycle or several cycles in sequence on an Irregular point pattern If you are using drilling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the hole centers If you are using milling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the starting point coordinates of the respective cycle e g center point coordinates of a circular pocket Coordinates in the spindle axis correspond to the coordinate of the workpiece surface Creating a point table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager MGT Enter the name and file type of the point table and ENT confirm your entry with the ENT key nn To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC changes to the program blocks window and displays an empty point tabl
75. parameters Q15X see Measurement results in Q parameters on page 387 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 New Functions of Software 340 49x 03 New Functions of Software 340 49x 04 New cycle for saving a machine s kinematic configuration see SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 option on page 450 New cycle for testing and optimizing a machine s kinematic configuration see MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 option on page 452 Cycle 412 Number of measuring points selectable through parameter 0423 see DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 on page 348 Cycle 413 Number of measuring points selectable through parameter 0423 see DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 on page 352 Cycle 421 Number of measuring points selectable through parameter 0423 see MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 on page 395 Cycle 422 Number of measuring points selectable through parameter 0423 see MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 on page 399 Cycle 3 Error message can be suppressed if the stylus is already deflected when a cycle starts see MEASURING Cycle 3 on page 437 New Functions of Software 340 49x 05 New machining cycle for single fluted deep hole drilling see SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO G241 on page 94 Touch Probe Cycle 404 SET BASIC ROTATION was expanded by parameter Q305 Number in table i
76. parameters during a program interruption and overwrite them if required HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 18 a G120 7 4 CONTOUR DATA E i 20 DIN ISO G121 7 5 PILOT DRILLING cyte 21 DIN ISO 7 5 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 DIN ISO G121 Cycle run 1 2 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F Then the tool retracts at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the control At a total hole depth up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached After a dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is returned to the Starting position at rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking Application Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for roughing Please note while programming Before programming note the following When calculating the infeed points the TNC does not account for the delta value DR programmed i
77. points 1 and 4 2 and 3 Input range O to 99999 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling The TNC performs the first step at half the programmed feed rate Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 5 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 DIN ISO G232 Cycle run Cycle 232 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds while taking the finishing allowance into account Three machining strategies are available Strategy Q389 0 Meander machining stepover outside the surface being machined Strategy 0389 1 Meander machining stepover within the surface being machined Strategy 0389 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position 1 using positioning logic If the current position in the spindle axis is greater than the 2nd setup clearance the TNC positions the tool first in the machining plane and then in the spindle axis Otherwise it first moves to the 2nd setup clearance and then in the machining plane The starting point in the machining plane is offset from the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety clearance to the side The tool then moves in the spindle axis at the positioning feed rate to the first plunging depth calculated by the control
78. preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the first touch point 1 see figure at upper right The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the respective traverse direction Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed 3rd measuring point Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the coordinates of the determined corner in the Q parameters listed below If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing 0151 Actual value of corner in reference axis Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis 356 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touc
79. probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Nominal length 0311 Nominal value of the length to be measured Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Maximum dimension Q288 Maximum permissible length Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Minimum dimension 0289 Minimum permissible length Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Q263 X OA 5 10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 ISO G426 o il G426 m x D 3 O sa e zA A E o MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 ISO 416 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR426 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not activ
80. programmed feed rate F If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the setup clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again at FMAX to the setup clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the setup clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 ee G203 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 Please note while programming 80 Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 203 Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 al
81. r Active tool radius in mm MP6510 Maximum permissible error of measurement 480 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Entries in the tool table TOOL T CUT Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the Wear tolerance length Number of teeth entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the Wear tolerance radius entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status I Input range O to 0 9999 mm DIRECT Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation TT R OFFS For tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center Cutting direction M3 and tool center Preset value Tool radius R NO ENT means R Tool offset radius 19 1 Fundamentals TT L OFFS Tool radius measurement Tool offset in addition to MP6530 Tool offset length between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default 0 LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection Breakage tolerance length If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status I Input range O to 0 9999 mm Input examples for common to
82. range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the ridge center If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the slot center Input range O to 2999 New datum 0405 absolute Coordinate in the measuring axis at which the TNC should set the calculated ridge center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 MP6140 03220 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il gt Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify Example NC blocks whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of
83. reference axis 0152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter 352 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a high estimate for the nominal diameter of the stud Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle increment Q247 the less accurately the TNC can calculate the datum Minimum input value bie Cycle parameters a13 Center in lst axis 0321 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
84. reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 3 DRILLING T 200 3 3 DRILLING Ml 200 Cycle parameters 200 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at setup clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release Input range O to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision b
85. see Cycle parameters on page 461 New Touch Probe Cycle 452 PRESET COMPENSATION simplifies the measurement of tool changer heads see PRESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO G452 option on page 466 New Touch Probe Cycle 484 for calibrating the wireless TT 449 tool touch probe see Calibrating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 DIN ISO G484 on page 484 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 New Functions of Software 340 49x 05 Functions Changed in Software 340 49x 05 Functions Changed in Software 340 49x 05 The cyclindrical surface cycles 27 28 29 and 39 can now also be used with modulo rotary axes In the past Machine Parameter 810 x 0 was required Cycle 403 does not check whether touch points and compensation axis match As a result probing is also possible in a tilted coordinate system see BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO G403 on page 319 12 Functions Changed Since the Predecessor Versions 340 422 xx 340 423 xx The management of more than one block of calibration data was changed see Conversational Programming User s Manual HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Functions Changed Since the Predecessor Versions 340 422 xx 340 423 xx Table of Contents HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Fundamentals Overviews Using Cycles Canned Cycles Drilling canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling anned Cycles Pattern Defini
86. sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 Countersink Q360 Execution of the chamfer 0 before thread machining 1 after thread machining Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Feed rate for countersi
87. speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Feed rate for back boring 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during back boring in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time Q255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole Input range O to 3600 000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Z m lt N gt z 9 lt cc Q aa xX Q lt aa ae G204 m x D 3 p D O T e zA A 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO 86 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation Input of O is not permitted 1 Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the neg minor axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the pos minor axis direction gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before it is plunged into or retrac
88. the C axis continues being a part of the basic configuration Insert the tool changer head that will be used as a reference head Clamp the calibration ball gt Insert the touch probe Use Cycle 451 to measure the complete kinematics including the reference head gt Set the preset using 0432 2 or 3 in Cycle 451 after measuring the reference head HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 47 mi x lt D 2 D D 9D ap Q D D D D gt O D gt D fet Q a a G452 option a an COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO G452 option ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO 00 q Insert the second tool changer head Insert the touch probe Measure the head with Cycle 452 Measure only the axes that have actually been changed in this example only the A axis the C axis is hidden with 0422 The preset and the position of the calibration ball must not be changed during the complete process All other tool changer heads can be adjusted in the same way D The head change function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine manual 472 m x D 3 D gt 2 5 amp D aa O O 5 D 5 Q D D D 2 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Drift Compensation During machining various machine components are subject to drift due to varying a
89. the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 Otherwise the TNC generates an error message The TNC can only plunge reciprocally once the traversing length on the circular arc is at least three times the tool diameter E Alternative PREDEF gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 25 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 15 G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle oseMtN Iso 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 DIN ISO G256 Cycle run Use Cycle 256 to machine a rectangular stud If a dimension of the workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished dimension has been machined 1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position stud center in the positive X direction to the starting position for the stud machining The starting position is 2 mm to the right of the unmachined stud If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the setup clearance and from there It advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves tangentially on a semicircle to the stud contour and machines one revolution If the finished dimension cannot be machined with one revolution the TNC performs a stepover with the current factor and machines another revolution
90. the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G409 FCL 3 function F PT Cycle 409 DIN ISO LLJ Jam lt LLJ O LLI 9 oc Ji LO q HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 339 il 15 4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO G410 G410 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 410 finds the center of a rectangular pocket and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates Into a datum table or the preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 hen the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 3 Then the
91. the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The motion to the next line occurs within the workpiece borders The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd setup clearance Strategy O0389 2 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the setup clearance over the current infeed depth and then moves at the ore positioning feed rate directly back to the starting point in the next line The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and
92. the workpiece PLANE function Entry of axis angle User documentation as a context sensitive helo system smarl NC Programming of smarT NC and machining can be carried out simultaneously smarl NC Contour pocket on point pattern smarl NC Preview of contour programs in the file manager smarl NC Positioning strategy for machining point patterns 3 D line graphics Virtual tool axis USB support of block devices memory sticks hard disks CD ROM drives Filtering of externally created contours Possibility of assigning different depths to each subcontour in the contour formula DHCP dynamic IP address management Touch probe cycle for global setting of touch probe parameters smarl NC Graphic support of block scan smarl NC Coordinate transformation smarl NC PLANE function User s Manual User s Manual User s Manual smarl NC Pilot smarl NC Pilot smarl NC Pilot User s Manual User s Manual User s Manual User s Manual User s Manual User s Manual Page 444 smarl NC Pilot smarT NC Pilot smarT NC Pilot Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 TNC Model Software and Features New Functions of Software 340 49x 02 New Functions of Software 340 49x 02 New machine parameter for defining the p
93. this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the row in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the row in the Y axis Spacing of machining positions incremental Distance between the machining positions You can enter a positive or negative value Number of positions Total number of machining positions Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation around the entered starting point Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Example NC blocks Program run full sequence Programming and editing Starting point in X 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 0 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 40 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 52500 4 L Z 100 R FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF ROW1C 5 END PGM PLANE MM K ia eg i INFO 173 Using Canned Cycles Defining a single pattern PATTERN If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of th
94. tool call to define the touch probe axis HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G425 b miiti INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 16 MMREASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 412 Starting point in 1st axis 0328 absolute Starting point for probing in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis 0329 absolute Starting point for probing in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Offset for 2nd measurement Q310 incremental Distance by which the touch probe Is displaced before the second measurement If you enter 0 the TNC does not offset the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement Is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Nominal length 0311 Nominal value of the length to be measured Input range O to 99999 9999 Maximum dimension Q288 Maximum permissible length Input
95. touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO parameters _Parameternumber Meaning Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis n Q163 Deviation from diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle the less accurately the TNC can calculate the hole dimensions Minimum input value 5 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 395 il G421 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 421 KI 396 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute value Center of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the diameter of the hole Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Inout range 360 00
96. touch probe in the direction of the negative tool axis until a trigger signal is released 3 Finally the TNC moves the touch probe back to the starting point of the probing process and writes the effective touch probe length into the calibration data Cycle parameters Coordinate of datum absolute Exact coordinate of oe the point that is to be probed Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Reference system 0 ACT 1 REF Specify the coordinate system on which the entered datum is to be based 0 Entered datum is based on the active workpiece coordinate system ACT system 1 Entered datum is based on the active machine coordinate system REF system 436 Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 17 4 MEASURING Cycle 3 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 3 measures any position on the workpiece in a selectable direction Unlike other measuring cycles Cycle 3 enables you to enter the measuring path DIST and feed rate F directly Also the touch probe retracts by a definable value after determining the measured value MB 1 The touch probe moves from the current position at the entered teed rate in the defined probing direction The probing direction must be defined in the cycle as a polar angle 2 After the TNC has saved the position the touch probe stops The TNC saves the X Y Z coordinates of the probe tip center in three successive O parameters The TNC does not conduct any length or radius
97. touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing and saves the actual values in the following O parameters Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155 Actual value of length in the minor axis 15 4 DATUM OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO 340 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter low estimates for the lengths of the 1st and 2nd sides If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
98. zA D 5 Q 3 D D T wa or gt D L gt Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn LTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken LBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from MP6540 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF mi x D 3 2 D lt O oO O 5 D g h e 3 fet an ER Measuring the tool length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO gt Cutter measurement 0 No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth 486 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il 19 5 Measuring the tool radius Cycle 32 or 482 ISO G482 Cycle run To measure the tool radius program the cycle TCH PROBE 32 or TCH PROBE 482 See also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 479 Via input par
99. 0 sasic ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF gt Default setting for basic rotation Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Preset number in table Q305 Enter the preset number in the table in which the TNC is to save the determined basic rotation If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode Input range 0 to 2999 m X D 3 pei D O za e zA A 312 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 14 3 BASIC ROTATION from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO G401 Cycle run The Touch Probe Cycle 401 measures the centers of two holes Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in the working plane and the line connecting the two hole centers With the basic rotation function the TNC compensates the calculated value As an alternative you can also compensate the
100. 0 DIN ISO G270 Please note while programming If desired you can use this cycle to specify various properties of Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN Before programming note the following Cycle 270 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program If Cycle 270 is used do not define any radius compensation in the contour subprogram Approach and departure properties are always performed identically symmetrically by the TNC Define Cycle 270 before Cycle 25 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G270 7 10 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA ie 270 DIN ISO j il G270 7 10 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA coe 270 DIN ISO Cycle parameters gt Type of approach departure 0390 Definition of the type of approach or departure E 0390 0 Approach the contour tangentially on a circular arc m 0390 1 Approach the contour tangentially on a straight line 0390 2 Approach the contour at a right angle gt Radius compensation 0 R0 1 RL 2 RR 0391 Definition of the radius compensation 0391 0 Machine the defined contour without radius compensation E 0391 1 Machine the defined contour with compensation to the left E Q391 2 Machine the defined contour with compensation to the right gt Approach departure radius Q392 Only in effect if tangential approach on a circular path was selected Radius of the approach departure arc Input range 0O to 99999 9999 gt Center angle Q3
101. 00 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 MP6140 Q320 Q273 90279 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tio center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Maximum limit of size for hole Q275 Maximum permissible diameter for the hole circular pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size for hole Q276 Minimum permissible diam
102. 03 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 vertical plunging The TNC plunges perpendicularly regardless of the plunging angle ANGLE defined in the tool table E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 Otherwise the TNC generates an error message Plunge on a helical path only if there is enough space E 2 reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E Alternative PREDEF gt Feed rate for finishing O385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO G254 Cycle run Use Cycle 254 to completely machine a circular slot Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor
103. 2 Cycle function 292 Please note while programming 2972 Cycle parameters 293 12 4 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 DIN ISO G36 294 Cycle function 294 Please note while programming 294 Cycle parameters 294 12 5 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 295 Cycle function 295 Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system 296 Please note while programming 297 Cycle parameters 298 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 29 il 13 1 General Information about Touch Probe Cycles 300 Method of function 300 Cycles in the Manual and El Handwheel Modes 301 Touch probe cycles for automatic operation 301 13 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 303 Maximum traverse to touch point MP6130 303 Safety clearance to touch point MP6140 303 Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction MP6165 303 Consider a basic rotation in the Manual Operation mode MP6166 304 Multiple measurement MP6170 304 Confidence interval for multiple measurement MP6171 304 Touch trigger probe probing feed rate MP6120 305 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning MP6150 305 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning MP6151 305 KinematicsOpt Tolerance limit in Optimization mode MP6600 305 KinematicsOpt permissible deviation of the calibration ball radius MP6601 305 Execut
104. 202 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free 4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined in parameter Q336 5 If retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value 6 The TNC moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the setup clearance and then if entered to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX If Q214 0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 G202 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G202 Please note while programming a Q 76 Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with servo controlled spindle Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed After the cycle is completed the TNC restores the coolant and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle call Danger of collision Enter i
105. 2nd setup clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations have been executed Please note while programming Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the setup clearance workpiece surface and 2nd setup clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G220 DIN ISO 6 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle z j il G220 0 DIN ISO 6 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 22 Cycle parameters 228 se e 170 Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Pitch circle diameter Q244 Diameter of the pitch circle Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle Q245 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stopping angle Q246 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to full circles Do not enter the same val
106. 41 DIN ISO G441 FCL 2 function Cycle run Touch probe cycle 441 allows the global setting of different touch probe parameters e g positioning feed rate for all subsequently used touch probe cycles This makes It easy to optimize the programs so that reductions in total machining time are achieved Please note while programming There are no machine movements contained in Cycle 441 It only sets different probing parameters END PGM M02 M30 resets the global settings of Cycle 441 Before programming note the following You can activate automatic angle tracking Cycle Parameter Q399 only if Machine Parameter 6165 1 If you change Machine Parameter 6165 you must recalibrate the touch probe 444 Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il Cycle parameters m gt Positioning feed rate 0396 Define the feed rateat Example NC blocks e sla which the touch probe is moved to the specified positions Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Positioning feed rate FMAX 0 1 Q397 Define whether the touch probe is to move at FMAX rapid traverse to the specified positions 0 Move at feed rate from Q396 1 Move at FMAX gt Angle tracking 0399 Define whether the TNC is to orient the touch probe before each probing process 0 Do not orient 1 Orient the spindle before each probing process to increase the accuracy G O ad am t N aml Q LL E J q g gt Automatic interruption 0400 Define whether the
107. 5 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Inout range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 027340279 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF G422 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Maximum limit of size for stud Q277 Maximum permissible diameter for the stud Inpu
108. 530 G481 ft Measuring the tool length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO i il Please note while programming G481 following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the You can run an individual tooth measurement of tools with up to 20 teeth Cycle parameters Ti gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first A tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a time old format ai tool that has already been measured is to be 5 inspected If the tool is being measured for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool length L in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DL O It you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured length with the tool length L that is stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DL The deviation can also be used for Q parameter Q115 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool length tolerance for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool format status L in TOOL T 3 2 Q D et or gt D a m D lt 5 ee or gt o or D et T O O 2 y m X 2 3 p D gt D D T a D aa O
109. 8 Page 352 Page 356 Page 361 Page 365 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 417 DATUM IN TS AXIS 2nd soft key a17 Page 369 row Measuring any position in the touch 2r probe axis and defining it as datum 418 DATUM FROM 4 HOLES 2nd soft key row Measuring 4 holes crosswise and defining the intersection of the lines between them as datum Page 371 419 DATUM IN ONE AXIS 2nd soft key Mme Page 375 row Measuring any position in any axis Pa cn and defining it as datum Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for datum setting You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419 during an active rotation basic rotation or Cycle 10 Datum point and touch probe axis From the touch probe axis that you have defined in the measuring program the TNC determines the working plane for the datum Z or W Xand Y YorV Z and X xXor U and Z HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 15 1 Fundamentals k il Saving the calculated datum In all cycles for datum setting you can use the input parameters Q303 and Q305 to define how the TNC is to save the calculated datum Q305 0 Q303 any value The TNC sets the calculated datum in the display The new datum is active immediately At the same time the TNC saves the datum set in the display by the cycle in line O of the preset table Q305 not equal to 0 0303 1 This combination can only occur if you read in programs containing Cycles 410 to 418 created on
110. 9 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dimension type ang lin Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 N 2 G128 software option 1 28 DIN ISO 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle 28 DIN ISO G128 software option 1 Cycle run This cycle enables you to program a guide notch in two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface Unlike Cycle 27 with this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are nearly parallel You can machine exactly parallel walls by using a tool that is exactly as wide as the slot The smaller the tool is with respect to the slot width the larger the distortion in circular arcs and oblique line segments To minimize this process related distortion you can define in parameter Q21 a tolerance with which the TNC machines a slot as similar as possible to a slot machined with a tool of the same width as the slot Program the midpoint path of the contour together with the tool radius compensation With the radius compensation you s
111. 9 999 Number meas points B axis 0418 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the B axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Inout range O to 12 Start angle C axis 0419 absolute Starting angle in the C axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle C axis 0420 absolute Ending angle in the C axis at which the last measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid in C axis 0421 Angle of incidence in the C axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points C axis 0422 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the C axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Input range O to 12 ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the calibration ball in the plane with 4 or 3 probing points 3 probing points Increase the measuring speed 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points 00 q 470 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Adjustment of tool changer heads The goal of this procedure is for the workpiece preset to remain unchanged after changing rotary axes head exchange In the following example a fork head is adjusted to the A and C axes The A axis is changed whereas
112. 9 9999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the setup clearance to a deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 9 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed setup clearance above the workpiece surface and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference on a rounded arc if enough space is available The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F When the drilling depth is reached the TNC once again traverses a full circle to remove the material remaining after the initial plunge The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again Finally the TNC returns to the setup clearance at FMAX If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 9 BORE MILLING T 208 3 9 BORE MILLING Cyete 208 Please note while programming 92 Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool lower edge and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Depth Q201 incremental Di
113. 92 i i Index R Reaming 73 Recording the results of measurement 385 Rectangular pocket Roughing finishing 137 Rectangular pocket measurement 407 Rectangular stud 156 Rectangular stud measuring 403 Reference point Save in a datum table 332 Save in the preset table 332 Result parameters 332 387 Ridge measuring from outside 414 Rotation 272 Rough out See SL Cycles Rough out Ruled surface 247 Run 3 D data 243 S Scaling factor 274 Side finishing 195 Single fluted deep hole drilling 94 SL Cycles SL cycles Contour data 186 Contour geometry cycle 181 Contour train 197 Contour train data 199 Floor finishing 194 Fundamentals 178 238 Overlapping contours 182 232 Pilot drilling 188 Rough out 190 Side finishing 195 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula SL cycles with simple contour formula 238 Slot width measuring 411 492 T Tapping With a floating tap holder 103 With chip breaking 108 Without floating tap holder 105 108 Thermal expansion measuring 441 Thread drilling milling 120 Thread milling fundamentals 111 Thread milling countersinking 116 Tilting the working plane 278 Cycle 278 Guide 284 Tolerance monitoring 388 Tool compensation 388 Tool measurement 481 Calibrating the TT 483 484 Displaying the measuring results 482 Machine para
114. 93 Only in effect if tangential approach on a circular path was selected Angular length of the approach arc Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Distance to auxiliary point 0394 Only in effect if tangential approach on a straight line or right angle approach was selected Distance to the auxiliary point from which the TNC is to approach the contour Input range 0 to 99999 9999 200 Example NC blocks Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il 7 11 Programming examples les Ogramming examp Definition of workpiece blank Tool call coarse roughing tool diameter 30 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 201 il 7 11 Programming examples 8 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH OUT Q10 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q11 100 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q12 350 FEED RATE FOR ROUGHING Q18 0 sCOARSE ROUGHING TOOL Q19 150 sRECIPROCATION FEED RATE Q208 30000 RETRACTION FEED RATE Q401 100 FEED RATE FACTOR Q404 0 FINE ROUGH STRATEGY 9 CYCL CALL M3 10 L Z 250 RO FMAX M6 11 TOOL CALL 2 Z 3000 12 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH OUT Q10 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q11 100 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q12 350 FEED RATE FOR ROUGHING Q18 1 sCOARSE ROUGHING TOOL Q19 150 sRECIPROCATION FEED RATE Q208 30000 RETRACTION FEED RATE Q401 100 FEED RATE FACTOR Q404 0 FINE ROUGH STRATEGY 13 CYCL CALL M3 14 L Z 250 RO FMAX M2 15 LBL 1 16 L X 0 Y 30 RR 17 FC DR R30 CCX 30 CCY 30 18 FL AN 60 PDX 30 PDY 30 D10 19 FSELECT 3
115. 999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 MP6140 Q320 G402 14 4 BASIC nova over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO i il G402 m x D 3 pce O T e o A Traversing to clearance height Q301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF gt Default setting for basic rotation Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a Straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Preset number in table Q305 Enter the preset number in the table in which the TNC is to save the determined basic rotation If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode The p
116. 9999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 0263 0265 G420 MP6140 Q320 X 02727 16 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO j il G420 16 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO 394 Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis 0261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a m
117. Alternatively PREDEF gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO FU FZ gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Path overlap factor 0370 0370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m X D 3 pi D O za e o A 15 co G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle i G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle os MEN ISO 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 257 DIN ISO G257 Cycle run Use Cycle 257 to machine a circular stud If a diameter of the workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished diameter has bee
118. D Define cycle for machining the contour outside A Q218 90 FIRST SIDE LENGTH O Q424 100 WORKPC BLANK SIDE 1 Q219 80 2ND SIDE LENGTH V Q425 100 WORKPC BLANK SIDE 2 D Q220 0 sCORNER RADIUS O Q368 0 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q224 0 ROTATIONAL POSITION Q367 0 STUD POSITION Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q201 30 DEPTH Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH rove Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG LO Q200 2 SETUP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 2ND SETUP CLEARANCE Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP 10 CYCL CALL POS X 50 Y 50 Z 0 FMAX Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 11 L Z 250 RO FMAX M6 Tool change HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 j il Call slotting mill Define SLOT cycle No pre positioning in X Y required Starting point for second slot 5 8 Progra ino examples Call SLOT cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 66 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Fundamentals 6 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides two cycles for machining point patterns directly 220 CIRCULAR PATTERN 220 Page 169 gt 221 LINEAR PATTERN 221 Page 172 You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed cycles gt Cycle 200 Cycle 201 Cycle 202 Cycle 203 Cycle 204 Cycle 205 Cycle 206 Cycle 207 Cycle 208 Cycle 209 Cycle 240 Cycle 251 Cycle 252 Cycle 253 Cycle 254 Cycle 256 Cycl
119. FAUTO FU FZ HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 14 m X D 3 p D lt O za e a A G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle _ G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle wee 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 252 DIN ISO G252 Cycle run Use Cycle 252 CIRCULAR POCKET to completely machine circular pockets Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool plunges into the workpiece at the pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth Specify the plunging strategy with Parameter O366 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out taking the overlap factor Parameter Q370 and the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account At the end of the roughing operation the TNC moves the tool tangentially away from the pocket wall then moves by the setup clearance above the current pecking depth and returns from there at rapid traverse to the pocket center This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is reached Finishing 5 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the pocket walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The pocket wall is approached tangentially 6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside o
120. G232 Clearance to side Q357 incremental Safety clearance to the side of the workpiece when the tool approaches the first plunging depth and distance at which the stepover occurs If the machining strategy O389 0 or O389 2 is used Input range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF 10 5 FACE H Cycle 232 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 255 il m 10 6 Programming examples N 56 O D Oo co n 3 3 5 co x S 3 J D T Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition MULTIPASS MILLING Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Pre position near the starting point Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program 10 6 Programming examples j i a er LL ws q q 11 1 Fundamentals Overview Once a contour has been programmed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The TNC provides the following coordinate transformation cycles 7 DATUM SHIFT O m Page 262 For shifting contours directly within the m program or from datum tables 247 DATUM SETTING 2a7 Page 269 Datum setting du
121. HEIDENHAIN Manual operation Programming and PLtcCHT 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 180 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 4 L Z 100 RO FMAX 5 L X 20 Y 30 R FMAX M3 6 CYCL DEF 264 THREAD DRILLNG MLLNG Q335 18 F NOMINAL DIAMETER VERE MM THREAD PITCH Q201 18 Q356 20 Q253 752 Q351 1 Q202 5 Q258 8 Q257 8 Q256 0 Q358 8 Q359 8 Q200 2 Q203 8 Q204 50 Q206 152 Q207 500 6 END PGM NEU MM DEPTH OF THREAD sTOTAL HOLE DEPTH F PRE POSITIONING 3CLIMB OR UP CUT 3PLUNGING DEPTH JUPPER ADV STOP DIST DEPTH FOR CHIP BRKNG DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG DEPTH AT FRONT 3OFFSET AT FRONT 7SET UP CLEARANCE F SURFACE COORDINATE 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE 7 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG 7FEED RATE FOR MILLNG PRT SC SCROL BREAK editing DIAGNOSIS INFO 173 EE amp ENO PG UP PG ON HEIDENHAIN User s Manual Cycle Programming ITNC 530 NC Software 340 490 05 340 491 05 340 492 05 340 493 05 340 494 05 English en 12 2008 About this Manual The symbols used in this manual are described below About this Manual Do you desire any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnc userdoc heidenhain de HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 il TNC Model Software and Features TNC Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided
122. IC ROTATION over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO 316 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Cycle parameters lst stud Center in 1st axis absolute Center of the first stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Ist stud Center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute Center of the first stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Diameter of stud 1 0313 Approximate diameter of the 1st stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Inout range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height 1 in the probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis at which stud 1 Is to be measured Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd stud Center in 1st axis Q270 absolute Center of the second stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd stud Center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute Center of the second stud In the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Diameter of stud 2 0314 Approximate diameter of the 2nd stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Inout range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height 2 in the probe axis 0315 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis at which stud 2 is to be measured Input range 99999 9
123. IDENHAIN iTNC 530 275 il P SCALING Cycle 26 11 8 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 Effect With Cycle 26 you can account for shrinkage and oversize factors for each axis The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it Is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display Resetting Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis Please note while programming Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be enlarged or reduced by the same factor You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING with reference to the active datum 276 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters 25 cc Axis and scaling factor Select the coordinate axis axes by soft key and enter the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Input range 0 000000 to 99 999999 Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks E STEC SCALING Cycle 26 C i G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyl
124. L DEF Definition of the positioning behavior for _ poszrzons CYCL CALL PAT GLOBAL DEF PROBING on ner Page 54 Definition of specific touch probe cycle PROBING parameters 50 Program run full sequence BEGIN PGM PLANE MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 TOOL CALL 1 Z 52500 L 2Zt166 R FMAX END PGM PLANE MM UPWNe amp 100 105 110 111 125 120 GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF ee GENERAL DRILLING POCKT MLNG CNTR MLLNG POSITIONG PROBING Programming and editing Y 0 Z 0 Y 100 Z 40 DIAGNOSIS INFO 1 73 Using Canned Cycles il Entering GLOBAL DEF definitions Select the Programming and Editing operating mode Prosan run Programming and editing full sequence i i 2 BEGIN PGM PLANE MM Press the Special Functions key OBER LEGIT Gio ty Geen Make Bo 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 40 i 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 52500 mremen Select the functions for program defaults A a eer identi 5 END PGM PLANE MM eee Select GLOBAL DEF functions DEF 120 Select the desired GLOBAL DEF function e g GLOBAL GLOBAL DEF GENERAL DEF COMMON e DIAGNOSIS Enter the required definitions and confirm each entry ay with the ENT key ag 108 105 110 111 125 120 L GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GLOBAL DEF GENERAL DRILLING POCKT MLNG CNTR MLLNG POSITIONG PROBING Using GLOBAL DEF information
125. L T gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 Is active 0 Move between operations on a straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 6 MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 G422 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 422 measures the center and diameter of a circular Stud If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in
126. Pocket 7 1 SL Cycles 7 1 SL Cycles Fundamentals SL cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up to 12 subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours in subprograms The TNC calculates the total contour trom the subcontours Subprogram numbers that you enter in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY contour subprograms is limited The number of possible contour elements depends on the type of contour inside or outside contour and the number of subcontours You can program up to 8192 contour elements The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all SL cycles conduct comprehensive and complex internal calculations as well as the resulting machining operations For safety reasons always run a graphical program test before machining This is a simple way of finding out whether the TNC calculated program will provide the desired results Characteristics of the Subprograms E Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RR E The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockw
127. RE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO q 454 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Machines with Hirth coupled axes In order to be positioned the axis must move out of the Hirth coupling So remember to leave a large enough safety clearance to prevent any risk of collision between the touch probe and calibration ball Also ensure that there is enough space to reach the safety clearance software limit switch Define a retraction height Q408 greater than O if software option 2 M128 FUNCTION TCPM is not available If necessary the TNC rounds the calculated measuring positions so that they fit into the Hirth grid depending on the start angle end angle and number of measuring points The measuring positions are calculated from the start angle end angle and number of measurements for the respective axis Example calculation of measuring positions for an A axis Start angle Q411 30 End angle 0412 90 Number of measuring points Q414 4 Calculated angular step 0412 0411 0414 1 Calculated angular step 90 30 4 1 120 3 40 Measuring position 1 0411 0 angular step 30 Measuring position 2 0411 1 angular step 10 Measuring position 3 0411 2 angular step 50 Measuring position 4 0411 3 angular step 90 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G451 option D ati KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO il Choice of number of measuring points 2 To save time you
128. STUD 298 Page 156 Roughing finishing cycle with stepover If a multiple passes are required 257 CIRCULAR STUD 257 Page 160 Roughing finishing cycle with stepover if iO multiple passes are required 136 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO G251 Cycle run Use Cycle 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET to completely machine rectangular pockets Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool plunges into the workpiece at the pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth Specify the plunging strategy with Parameter O366 2 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out taking the overlap factor Parameter 0370 and the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 At the end of the roughing operation the TNC moves the tool tangentially away from the pocket wall then moves by the setup clearance above the current pecking depth and returns from there at rapid traverse to the pocket center 4 This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is reached Finishing 5 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the pocket walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The pocket wall is
129. Strategy 0389 0 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd setup clearance HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G232 10 5 FACE _ Cycle 232 DIN ISO b il G232 10 5 FACE P Cycle 232 DIN ISO Strategy Q389 1 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies within the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to
130. T Cycle 409 DIN ISO G409 FCL 3 function Sof Cycle run 337 Please note while programming 337 Cycle parameters 338 15 4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO G410 340 Cycle run 340 Please note while programming 341 Cycle parameters 341 15 5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO G411 344 Cycle run 344 Please note while programming 345 Cycle parameters 345 15 6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 348 Cycle run 348 Please note while programming 349 Cycle parameters 349 15 7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 352 Cycle run 352 Please note while programming 393 Cycle parameters 353 15 8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO G414 356 Cycle run 356 Please note while programming 357 Cycle parameters 358 15 9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO G415 361 Cycle run 361 Please note while programming 362 Cycle parameters 362 15 10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO G416 365 Cycle run 365 Please note while programming 366 Cycle parameters 366 15 11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO G417 369 Cycle run 369 Please note while programming 369 Cycle parameters 370 32 15 12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN
131. TNC offers twelve cycles for automatically finding reference points and handling them as follows Setting the determined values directly as display values Entering the determined values in the preset table Entering the determined values in a datum table 408 SLOT CENTER REF PT Measuring the inside width of a slot and defining the slot center as datum 409 RIDGE CENTER REF PT Measuring the outside width of a ridge and defining the ridge center as datum 410 DATUM INSIDE RECTAN Measuring the inside length and width of a rectangle and defining the center as datum 411 DATUM OUTSIDE RECTAN Measuring the outside length and width of a rectangle and defining the center as datum 412 DATUM INSIDE CIRCLE Measuring any four points on the inside of a circle and defining the center as datum 413 DATUM OUTSIDE CIRCLE Measuring any four points on the outside of a circle and defining the center as datum 414 DATUM OUTSIDE CORNER Measuring two lines from the outside of the angle and defining the intersection as datum 415 DATUM INSIDE CORNER Measuring two lines from within the angle and defining the intersection as datum 416 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER 2nd soft key row Measuring any three holes on a bolt hole circle and defining the bolt hole center as datum 330 408 h 409 Xi D pe tbs E D pey H l D pey Oj D o 4 14 Page 333 Page 337 Page 340 Page 344 Page 34
132. TSIDE Cycle 424 ISO 6424 407 Cycle run 407 Please note while programming 408 Cycle parameters 408 16 9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 411 Cycle run 411 Please note while programming 411 Cycle parameters 412 34 16 10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 ISO G426 414 Cycle run 414 Please note while programming 414 Cycle parameters 415 16 11 MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO 6427 417 Cycle run 417 Please note while programming 417 Cycle parameters 418 16 12 MEAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO G430 420 Cycle run 420 Please note while programming 420 Cycle parameters 421 16 138 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO G431 424 Cycle run 424 Please note while programming 425 Cycle parameters 426 16 14 Programming examples 428 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 17 1 Fundamentals 434 Overview 434 17 2 CALIBRATE TS Cycle 2 435 Cycle run 435 Please note while programming 435 Cycle parameters 435 17 3 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH Cycle 9 436 Cycle run 436 Cycle parameters 436 17 4 MEASURING Cycle 3 437 Cycle run 437 Please note while programming 437 Cycle parameters 438 17 5 MEASURING IN 3 D Cycle 4 FCL 3 function 439 Cycle run 439 Please note while programming 439 Cycle pa
133. a INC 4xx read in programs containing Cycles 410 to 418 created with an older software version on an iITNC 530 did not specifically define the measured value transfer with parameter Q303 when defining the cycle 15 1 Fundamentals In these cases the TNC outputs an error message since the complete handling of REF referenced datum tables has changed You must define a measured value transfer yourself with parameter 0303 Q305 not equal to 0 Q303 0 The TNC writes the calculated reference point in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system The value of parameter Q305 determines the datum number Activate datum with Cycle 7 in the part program Q305 not equal to 0 0303 1 The TNC writes the calculated reference point in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF coordinates The value of parameter Q305 determines the preset number Activate preset with Cycle 247 in the part program Measurement results in Q parameters The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160 You can use these parameters in your program Note the table of result parameters that are listed with every cycle description 332 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 S FCL 3 function Cycle run Y se Touch Probe Cycle 408 finds th
134. a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q EAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO parameters _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ _ Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q163 Deviation from diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle the less accurately the TNC can calculate the dimensions of the stud Minimum input value 5 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 399 il G422 EAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 400 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the Stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the diameter of the stud Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Starting angle 032
135. a datum table 268 11 4 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 DIN ISO G247 269 Effect 269 Please note before programming 269 Cycle parameters 269 11 5 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO G28 270 Effect 270 Please note while programming 270 Cycle parameters 271 11 6 ROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO G73 272 Effect 212 Please note while programming 272 Cycle parameters 243 11 7 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO G72 274 Effect 274 Cycle parameters 275 11 8 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 276 Effect 276 Please note while programming 276 Cycle parameters 277 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 27 il 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 DIN ISO G80 software option 1 278 Effect 278 Please note while programming 279 Cycle parameters 279 Resetting 279 Position the axis of rotation 280 Position display in the tilted system 282 Workspace monitoring 282 Positioning in a tilted coordinate system 282 Combining coordinate transformation cycles 283 Automatic workpiece measurement in the tilted system 283 Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 284 11 10 Programming examples 286 12 1 Fundamentals 290 Overview 290 12 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO G04 291 Function 291 Cycle parameters 291 12 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO G39 29
136. al chapter 2 Automatically with a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual chapter 3 6 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run Full Sequence 7 Manual Operation mode Use the 3 D ROT soft key to set the TILT WWORKING PLANE function to INACTIVE Enter an angular value of 0 for each rotary axis in the menu HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyo DIN ISO j il 11 10 Programming examples Program sequence E Program the coordinate transformations in the main program E Machining within a subprogram 11 10 Programming examples Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition Tool call Retract the tool Shift datum to center Call milling operation Set label for program section repeat Rotate by 45 incremental Call milling operation Return jump to LBL 10 repeat the milling operation six times Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift 86 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il N HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 1 Define milling operation 11 10 Programming examples i i 12 1 Fundamentals 12 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides four cycles for the following special purposes 9 DWELL TIME a Page 291 12 PROGRAM CALL 12 Page 292 13 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP TER Page 294 i 32 TOLERANCE az Page 295 ofa 290 Cycles
137. ameters you can measure the radius of a tool by two methods Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the milling tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in MP6530 The TNC probes the tool radially while it is rotating If you have programmed a subsequent measurement of individual teeth the control measures the radius of each tooth with the aid of oriented spindle stops Please note while programming following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be measured with stationary spindle To do so define the number of teeth CUT with O and adjust the machine parameter 6500 Refer to your machine manual HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G482 19 5 Measuring the tool radius Cycle 32 or 482 ISO j il q Cycle parameters z gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first g li tool is to be measured for the first time or whethera time old format n E tool that has already been measured is to be ts inspected If the tool is being measured for the first
138. an compensate for machine drift for example This procedure is also possible on a machine without rotary axes 1 Clamp the calibration ball and check for potential collisions 2 Set the preset in the calibration ball 3 Set the preset on the workpiece and start machining the workpiece 4 Use Cycle 452 for preset compensation at regular intervals The TNC measures the drift of the axes involved and compensates it in the kinematics description Q141 Standard deviation measured in the A axis 1 if axis was not measured G452 option Q142 Standard deviation measured in the B axis 1 if axis was not measured Q143 Standard deviation measured in the C axis 1 if axis was not measured Q144 Optimized standard deviation in the A axis 1 if axis was not measured Q145 Optimized standard deviation in the B axis 1 if axis was not measured Q146 Optimized standard deviation in the C axis 1 if axis was not measured RESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 467 il G452 option 18 5 PRESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO Please note while programming 468 In order to be able to perform a preset compensation the kinematics must be specially prepared The machine tool manual provides further information Note that all functions for tilting in the working plane are reset M128 or FUNCTION TCPM are deactivated Position of the calibrating ball on the machine table so tha
139. ance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF m X D 3 D O e zA A Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the setup clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and then moves at FMAX to the setup clearance above the first plunging depth The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached The tool is retracted from the hole bottom to the setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX Please note while programming center in the working plane with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point hole The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC
140. ance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the bolt hole circle center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum Is on the bolt hole center Input range 0 to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the bolt hole center Default setting O Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 03372 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the bolt hole center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system Is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G416 15 10 CIRCLE CENTER Cy
141. and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q parameters _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis 0154 Actual value of length in the reference axis Q155 Actual value of length in the minor axis Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q164 Deviation of side length in reference axis Q165 Deviation of side length in minor axis HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 407 il G424 B MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE Cycle 424 ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 424 a 408 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length Q282 Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to OL TRESS 99999 9999 2nd side length Q283 Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate
142. angle of the B axis Q170 Spatial angle A Q171 Spatial angle B Q172 Spatial angle C Q173 to Q175 Measured values in the touch probe axis first to third measurement 424 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 p MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO G431 S i G431 za 16 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 426 lst meas point lst axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 3rd axis Q294 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point lst axis 0265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 3rd axis Q295 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 1st axis 0296 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the reference axis
143. ans that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 73 il N g 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISC Cycle parameters 74 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during reaming in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate Input range O to 99999 999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF m x D 3 O za e zA A Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G
144. ar offset between the nominal position and the actual position of a hole center The TNC compensates the determined angular offset by rotating the C axis The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the rotary table but the Y coordinate of the hole must be positive If you measure the angular misalignment of the hole with touch probe axis Y horizontal position of the hole it may be necessary to execute the cycle more than once because the measuring strategy causes an inaccuracy of approx 1 of the misalignment 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points and positions the touch probe on the hole centers measured Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height an
145. arameter Q204 2nd setup clearance At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting point center of the circular arc in the working plane Exception if you define a slot position not equal to O then the TNC only positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd setup clearance In these cases always program absolute traverse movements after the cycle call The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed If the slot width is greater than twice the tool diameter the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly from inside out You can therefore mill any slots with small tools too The slot position O is not allowed if you use Cycle 254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221 Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool to the first plunging depth at rapid traverse Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Cycle parameters 254 i gt Fe Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Def
146. arameter has no effect if the misalignment is to be compensated by a rotation of the rotary table Q402 1 In this case the misalignment is not saved as an angular value Input range 0 to 2999 Basic rotation alignment 0402 Specify whether the TNC should compensate misalignment with a basic rotation or by rotating the rotary table 0 Set basic rotation 1 Rotate the rotary table When you select rotary table the TNC does not save the measured misalignment not even when you have defined a table line in parameter Q305 gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment The TNC sets the display to 0 only if you have defined Q402 1 14 4 BASIC ROTAREN over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO 318 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 14 5 BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO G403 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 403 determines a workpiece misalignment by measuring two points which must lie on a straight surface The TNC compensates the determined misalignment by rotating the A B or C axis The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the rotary table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positio
147. asuring a rotating tool the TNC automatically calculates the spindle speed and feed rate for probing The spindle speed is calculated as follows n MP6570 r 0 0063 where n Spindle speed rom MP6570 Maximum permissible cutting speed in m min r Active tool radius in mm The feed rate for probing is calculated from v meas tolerance n where V Feed rate for probing in mm min Measuring Measuring tolerance mm depending on MP6507 tolerance n Speed in rom HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 19 1 Fundamentals k il 19 1 Fundamentals MP6507 determines the calculation of the probing feed rate MP6507 0 The measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool radius With very large tools however the feed rate for probing is reduced to zero The smaller you set the maximum permissible rotational soeed MP6570 and the permissible tolerance MP6510 the sooner you will encounter this effect MP6507 1 The measuring tolerance is adjusted relative to the size of the tool radius This ensures a sufficient feed rate for probing even with large tool radii The TNC adjusts the measuring tolerance according to the following table Up to 30 mm MP6510 30 to 60 mm 2 MP6510 60 to 90 mm 3 e MP6510 90 to 120 mm 4 e MP6510 MP6507 2 The feed rate for probing remains constant the error of measurement however rises linearly with the increase in tool radius Measuring tolerance r e MP6510 5 mm where
148. asuring points lt p 0 Move at measuring height between measuring D points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Execute basic rotation Q304 Definition of whether the TNC should compensate workpiece misalignment with a basic rotation 0 No basic rotation 1 Basic rotation Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the corner If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the corner Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system INSIDE OF CORNER C
149. auge successively in X Y X and Y Finally the TNC moves the touch probe to the clearance height and writes the effective radius of the ball tip to the calibration data Please note while programming Before you begin calibrating you must define in Machine Parameters 6180 0 to 6180 2 the center of the calibrating workpiece in the working space of the machine REF coordinates If you are working with several traverse ranges you can save a separate set of coordinates for the center of each calibrating workpiece MP6181 1 to 6181 2 and MP6182 1 to 6182 2 Cycle parameters CAL Clearance height absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the touch probe cannot collide with the calibration workpiece or any fixtures Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Radius of ring gauge Radius of the calibrating workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Inside calib 0 outs calib 1 Definition of whether the TNC is to calibrate from inside or outside 0 Calibrate from inside 1 Calibrate from outside HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 17 2 CALIBRATE TS Cycle 2 Example NC blocks j il 17 3 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH Cycle 9 17 3 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH Cycle 9 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 9 automatically calibrates the length of a touch trigger probe at a point that you determine 1 Pre position the touch probe so that the coordinate defined in the cycle can be accessed without collision 2 The TNC moves the
150. axis press the NO ENT key The TNC then enters a dash in that column To leave a datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file 268 Program run full sequence Datum table editing Datum shift File NULLTAB D MM gt gt X D Y Z Cc 0 0 0 0 1 25 0 0 0 2 12 20 472 0 0 3 10 0 150 0 0 4 27 25 12 5 0 10 0 5 250 325 10 0 90 6 250 248 15 0 0 7 1200 0 0 0 0 8 1700 0 0 0 0 8 1700 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 SE T INFO 173 a 5 54 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE INSERT DELETE NEXT f l t ii LINE LINE LINE Cycles Coordinate Transformations 11 4 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 DIN ISO G247 Effect With the Cycle DATUM SETTING you can activate as the new datum a preset defined in a preset table Aftera DATUM SETTING cycle definition all of the coordinate inputs and datum shifts absolute and incremental are referenced to the new preset Status display In the status display the TNC shows the active preset number behind the datum symbol Please note before programming When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC resets the active datum shift The TNC sets the preset only in the axes that are defined with values in the preset table The datums of axes marked with remain unchanged If you activate preset number O line 0 the
151. ay so that the new datum is on the corner Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G414 15 8 DATUM i iii OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO j il G414 15 8 DATUM UTSiDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO 360 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only eff
152. be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle B axis 0416 absolute Ending angle in the B axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid in B axis 0417 Angle of incidence in the B axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points B axis 0418 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the B axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Inout range O to 12 EASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO q 462 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Start angle C axis 0419 absolute Starting angle in g the C axis at which the first measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Boe J End angle C axis 0420 absolute Ending angle in the Q C axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 q Angle of incid in C axis 0421 Angle of incidence LO in the C axis at which the other rotary axes are to be q measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 g Number meas points C axis 0422 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the C axis If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Input range O to 12 No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the calibration ball in the plane with 4 or 3 probing points 3 probing points increase t
153. be in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approached Cycle parameters Parameter number for result Enter the number of La CS the Q parameter to which you want to assign the coordinate Input range 0 to 1999 Probing axis Probing direction Enter the probing axis with the axis selection keys or ASCII keyboard and the algebraic sign for the probing direction Confirm your entry with the ENT key Input range All NC axes Nominal position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 To conclude the input press the ENT key 390 Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 3 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 DIN ISO Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 1 measures any position on the workpiece in any direction 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle 2 Then the touch probe approaches the workpiece at the feed rate assigned in MP6120 or MP6360 During probing the TNC moves simultaneously in 2 axes depending on the probing angle The scanning direction is defined by the polar angle entered in the cycle 3 After the TNC has saved the position the probe returns to the Starting point The TNC also stores the coordinates of the to
154. can make a rough optimization with a small number kS of measuring points 1 2 O You then make a fine optimization with a medium number of measuring points recommended value 4 Higher numbers of LO measuring points do not usually improve the results Ideally you ep should distribute the measuring points evenly over the tilting range of the axis This is why you should measure an axis with a tilting range of 0 360 at 3 measuring points at 90 180 and 270 If you want to check the accuracy accordingly you can enter a higher number of measuring points in the Check mode These positions do not provide any metrologically relevant You must not define a measuring point at 0 or 360 data Choice of the calibrating ball position on the machine table In principle you can fix the calibrating ball to any position to the machine table If it is possible you can also fasten the calibration ball on fixtures or workpieces e g using a magnetic clamp The following factors can influence the result of measurement On machines with rotary tables tilting tables Clamp the calibrating ball as far as possible away from the center of rotation Machines with very large traverse Clamp the calibration ball as closely as possible to the position intended for subsequent machining EASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO q 456 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Notes on the accuracy Th
155. ch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Q263 Q265 G400 MP6140 Q320 X 272 1 ASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO q i il G40
156. cle 409 DIN ISO G409 S FCL 3 function z Cycle run y mM Touch Probe Cycle 409 finds the center of a ridge and defines its al center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates Q into a datum table or the preset table LL 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the g cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 u 2 Ihen the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and O probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or V MP6360 3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next touch a point 2 and probes the second touch point A 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle o p parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters a listed below b 5 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch ET probe axis in a separate probing Q _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ Q166 Actual value of measured ridge width 7 Q157 Actual value of the centerline LL Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a h
157. cle 416 DIN ISO j il G416 15 10 Mlun CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO 368 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 and is only effective when the datum is probed in the touch probe axis Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF
158. cle 416 finds the center of a bolt hole circle and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the point entered as center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the third hole 3 6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the third hole center 7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below 3 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing 0151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis 0153 Actual value of bolt hole circl
159. compensations You define the number of the first result parameter in the cycle 3 Finally the TNC moves the touch probe back by that value against the probing direction that you defined in the parameter MB 17 4 MEASURING Cycle 3 Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 437 il 17 4 MEASURING Cycle 3 Cycle parameters 438 Parameter number for result Enter the number of the Q parameter to which you want the TNC to assign the first measured coordinate X The values Y and Z are in the immediately following O parameters Input range 0 to 1999 Probing angle Enter the angle in whose direction the probe is to move and confirm with the ENT key Input range X Y or Z Probing angle Angle measured from the probing axis at which the touch probe is to move Confirm with ENT Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 Maximum measuring path Enter the maximum distance from the starting point by which the touch probe is to move Confirm with ENT Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for measurement Enter the measuring feed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 3000 000 Maximum retraction path Iraverse path in the direction opposite the probing direction after the stylus was deflected The TNC returns the touch probe to a point no farther than the starting point so that there can be no collision Input range O to 99999 9999 Reference system 0 ACT 1 REF Specify whether the probing directi
160. cremental Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate F O206 Traversing speed of the tool during tapping Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO G206 gt Dwell time at bottom Q211 Enter a value between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p F Feed rate mm min S Spindle speed rom p Thread pitch mm Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the tool 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 oso 104 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 DIN ISO G207 Cycle run The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more passes 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX 2 The too
161. cur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Retracting after a program interruption If you Interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft key If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 i A YY SAAANA AN x wl M E7 VV AN VAY oS N N vo Ow z2 gt Q d lt b Ke J 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating i i G209 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Miso 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 DIN ISO G209 Cycle run The TNC machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the programmed depth You can define in a parameter whether the tool is to be retracted completely from the hole for chip breaking 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed setup clearance above the workpiece surface There it carries out an oriented spindle stop 2 The tool moves to the programmed infeed depth reverses the direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance or completely for chip breaking depending on the definition If you have defined a factor for increasing the spindle speed the TNC retracts from the hole at the corresponding speed 3 It then reverses the direct
162. d aligns the workpiece by rotating the table The TNC rotates the rotary table so that the hole center after compensation lies in the direction of the positive Y axis or on the nominal position of the hole center both with a vertical and horizontal touch probe axis The measured angular misalignment is also available in parameter Q150 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Y LO x CS OO To O DS sZ TO q O LO O gt t 2 o a A O c am D w a eb S A 14 7 vompen nap f il Please note while programming OVD OSI NIC SOP 91949 xe 4 y Bulj e 0O1 Ag zu wuiesiwu s d TLATEN ulzeSUSdWIOY PL Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 324 Cycle parameters IS G405 a05 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the 6i hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute value Center of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position angle of the hole center Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the circular pocket or hole Enter a value that is more likely to be too small than too large Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle Q325 absolute An
163. d Milling il Cycle parameters gt Nominal diameter Q335 Nominal thread diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Threads per step 0355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is moved 0 one 360 helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by 0355 multiplied by the pitch Input range O to 99999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF gt Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clea
164. d also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G411 m X D 3 p D Z O za e o A 15 5 DATUM FROM J ai OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 347 il G412 15 6 DATUM Aon INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 15 6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 412 finds the center of a circular pocket or of a hole and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can als
165. d in the cycle From this point the tool advances to the first contour point at the feed rate for plunging The TNC subsequently processes all points that are stored in the digitizing data file at the feed rate for milling If necessary the TNC retracts the tool between machining operations to the setup clearance if specific areas are to be left unmachined At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the setup clearance Please note while programming You can particularly use Cycle 30 to run conversational programs created offline in multiple infeeds HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G60 10 2 RUN pa DATA Cycle 30 DIN ISO i il Cycle parameters G60 20 gt PGM name 3 D data Enter the name of the program in pata which the contour data is stored If the file is not stored in the current directory enter the complete path A maximum of 254 characters can be entered gt Min point of range Lowest coordinates X Y and Z coordinates in the range to be milled Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Max point of range Largest coordinates X Y and Z coordinates in the range to be milled Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance 1 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface for tool movements at rapid traverse Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth 2 incremental value Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging
166. d therefore reduces wear on the machine tool The tolerance defined in the cycle also affects the traverse paths on circular arcs If necessary the TNC automatically reduces the programmed feed rate so that the program can be machined at the fastest possible speed without short pauses for computing time Even if the TNC does not move with reduced speed it will always comply with the tolerance that you have defined The larger you define the tolerance the faster the TNC can move the axes Smoothing the contour results in a certain amount of deviation from the contour The size of this contour error tolerance value is set ina machine parameter by the machine manufacturer With CYCLE 32 you can change the pre set tolerance value and select different filter settings provided that your machine manufacturer implements these features HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G62 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO j il G62 Po Cycle 32 DIN ISO Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system The most important factor of influence in offline NC program creation is the chord error S defined in the CAM system The maximum point spacing of NC programs generated in a postprocessor PP is defined through the chord error If the chord error is less than or equal to the tolerance value T defined in Cycle 32 then the TNC can smooth the contour points unless any special machine settings limit the programmed feed rate You will achieve optimal smo
167. damentals 238 Entering a simple contour formula 240 Contour machining with SL Cycles 240 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 25 il 10 1 Fundamentals 242 Overview 242 10 2 RUN 3 D DATA Cycle 30 DIN ISO G60 243 Cycle run 243 Please note while programming 243 Cycle parameters 244 10 3 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 DIN ISO G230 245 Cycle run 245 Please note while programming 245 Cycle parameters 246 10 4 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 DIN ISO G21 247 Cycle run 247 Please note while programming 248 Cycle parameters 249 10 5 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 DIN ISO G232 251 Cycle run 251 Please note while programming 253 Cycle parameters 253 10 6 Programming examples 256 26 11 1 Fundamentals 260 Overview 260 Effect of coordinate transformations 261 11 2 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO G54 262 Effect 262 Cycle parameters 262 11 3 DATUM shift with datum tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 263 Effect 263 Please note while programming 264 Cycle parameters 265 Selecting a datum table in the part program 265 Editing the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation 266 Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode 266 Transferring the actual values into the datum table 267 Configuring the datum table 268 To leave
168. dinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Spacing in 1st axis Q326 incremental Distance between the first and second measuring points in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Spacing in 2nd axis 0327 incremental Distance between third and fourth measuring points in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Corner 0308 Number identifying the corner which the TNC is to set as datum Input range 1 to 4 MP6140 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the me
169. dle cooling cooling lubricant at least 30 bars compressed air supply at least 6 bars Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile To correct this effect you need tool specitic compensation values which are given in the tool catalog or are available from the tool manufacturer You program the compensation with the delta value for the tool radius DR in the TOOL CALL The Cycles 262 263 264 and 267 can only be used with rightward rotating tools For Cycle 265 you can use rightward and leftward rotating tools The working direction is determined by the following input parameters Algebraic sign Q239 right hand thread left hand thread and milling method Q351 1 climb 1 up cut The table below illustrates the interrelation between the individual input parameters for rightward rotating tools Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z korai e ee Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z thread milling to the tool cutting edge Since the TNC however always displays the feed rate relative to the path of the tool tip the displayed value does not match the programmed value The TNC references the programmed feed rate during The machining direction of the thread changes if you execute a thread milling cycle in connection with Cycle 8 MIRRORING in only one axis
170. duction through parameter Q401 is an FCL3 function and is not automatically available after a software update see Feature content level upgrade functions on page 6 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G122 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO j il q Cycle parameters N q 2z gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Example NC blocks D es Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 E E h Feed rate for plunging Q11 Plunging feed rate in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ w gt Feed rate for roughing Q12 Milling feed rate in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ w gt Coarse roughing tool Q18 or OS18 Number or name of the tool with which the TNC has already coarse roughed the contour Switch to name input Press the TOOL NAME soft key The TNC automatically inserts the closing quotation mark when you exit the input field If there was no coarse roughing enter 0 if you enter a number or a name the TNC will only rough out the portion that could not be machined with the coarse roughing tool If the portion that is to be roughed cannot be approached from the side the TNC will mill in a reciprocating plunge cut For this purpose you must enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table TOOL T and define the maximum plunging ANGLE of the tool The TNC will otherwise generate an error message Input range 0 to 32767 9 if
171. e With the soft key INSERT LINE insert new lines and sus enter the coordinates of the desired machining position Repeat the process until all desired coordinates have been entered second soft key row you can specify which coordinates With the soft keys X OFF ON Y OFF ON Z OFF ON you want to enter in the point table HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 2 4 Point i 2 4 point Miles Hiding single points from the machining process In the FADE column of the point table you can specify if the defined point is to be hidden during the machining process Select the FADE column In the table select the point to be hidden Activate hiding or ENT jno Deactivate hiding ENT 64 Using Canned Cycles il Selecting a point table in the program In the Programming and Editing mode of operation select the program for which you want to activate the point table Press the PGM CALL key to call the function for es selecting the point table Press the POINT TABLE soft key Enter the name of the point table and confirm your entry with the END key If the point table is not stored in the same directory as the NC program you must enter the complete path Example NC block HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 2 4 Point i 2 4 point hies Calling a cycle in connection with point tables last defined even if you defined the point table in a With CYCL CALL PAT the TNC runs the point
172. e gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 11 MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO G427 G427 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 427 finds a coordinate in a selectable axis and saves the value in a system parameter If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction 2 Thenthe TNC positions the touch probe to the entered touch point 1 in the working plane and measures the actual value in the selected axis 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured coordinate in the following O parameter Q160 Measured coordinate Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis O Y m N N 2 gt 2 q Z A as O O Q LLI as gt Y lt LL 16 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 417 il m Cycle parameters N qf 427 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute g gt Ch Coordinate of th
173. e O to 999 Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 11 Programming examples 3 11 Programming HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call tool radius 3 Retract the tool Cycle definition 80 9000 3 11 Programming ltifamples Approach hole 1 spindle ON Cycle call Approach hole 2 call cycle Approach hole 3 call cycle Approach hole 4 call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 9 8 Canned Cycles Drilling il The drill hole coordinates are stored in the pattern definition PATTERN DEF POS and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL PAT The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be seen in the test graphics Program sequence E Centering tool radius 4 E Drilling tool radius 2 4 E Tapping tool radius 3 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Definition of workpiece blank Call the centering tool tool radius 4 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F The TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle Define all drilling positions in the point pattern 3 11 Programming 3 11 Programming examples 6 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING Q200 2 SETUP CLEARANCE Q343 0 sSELECT DEPTH DIA Q201 2 DEPTH Q344 10 DIAMETER Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGN Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 3 2ND SETUP CLEARANCE 7 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 8 L Z 100 RO FMAX 9 TOOL CALL 2 Z 5000 10 L Z 10 RO F5000 11 CYCL
174. e O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q309 incremental Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy G254 O E 0 vertical plunging The TNC plunges perpendicularly regardless of the plunging angle ANGLE defined in the tool table E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 Otherwise the TNC generates an error message Plunge on a helical path only if there IS enough space E 2 reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for
175. e 257 Cycle 262 Cycle 263 Cycle 264 Cycle 265 Cycle 267 168 If you have to machine irregular point patterns use CYCL CALL PAT see Point Tables on page 63 to develop point tables More regular point patterns are available with the PATTERN DEF function see Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF on page 55 DRILLING REAMING BORING UNIVERSAL DRILLING BACK BORING UNIVERSAL PECKING TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW BORE MILLING TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING CENTERING RECTANGULAR POCKET CIRCULAR POCKET SLOT MILLING CIRCULAR SLOT can only be combined with Cycle 221 RECTANGULAR STUD CIRCULAR STUD THREAD MILLING THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING THREAD DRILLING MILLING HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Canned Cycles Pattern Definitions il 6 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 DIN ISO G220 Cycle run 1 The TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence Move to the 2nd setup clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches on a straight line or circular arc the Starting point for the next machining operation The tool stops at the set up clearance or the
176. e O6 incremental Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF hA m x D 3 p D O e e TA A Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dimension type ang lin Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 gt Slot width O20 Width of the slot to be machined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Tolerance Q21 If you use a tool smaller than the programmed slot width Q20 process related distortion occurs on the slot wall wherever the slot follows the path of an arc or oblique line If you define the tolerance O21 the TNC adds a subsequent milling operation to ensure that the slot dimensions are aclose as possible to those of a slot that has been milled with a tool exactly as wide as the slot With Q21 you define the permitted deviation from this ideal slot The number of subsequent milling operations depends on the cylinder radius
177. e center of a slot and defines its center aml as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a Q datum table or the preset table LL 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe 90 cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the g cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 u 2 Ihen the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and O probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or V MP6360 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring a height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point A 2 and probes the second touch point 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and 60 processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum as on page 332 and saves the actual values in the O parameters eb listed below O 5 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch gt probe axis In a separate probing Q aed _Parameternumber Meaning H Q166 Actual value of measured slot width 7 0157 Actual value of the centerline LL lt LL Q O Y LO pm HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 333 il F PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 FCL 3 function LL lt LL Q O a
178. e diameter HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G416 15 10 CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO j il G416 15 10 Mlun CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 366 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the approximate bolt hole circle diameter The smaller the hole diameter the more exact the nominal diameter must be Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Angle of 1st hole Q291 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the first hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 2nd hole Q292 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the second hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 3rd hole Q293 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the third hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clear
179. e entire pattern Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the pattern in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the pattern in the Y axis Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value Spacing of machining positions Y incremental Distance between the machining positions in the Y direction You can enter a positive or negative value Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated around the entered starting point Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the principal axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks Program run
180. e first touch point in the reference Moiese Eg axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Measuring axis 1 3 l reference axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF EASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO 16 418 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il gt Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNCis Example NC blocks to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate
181. e geometrical and positioning error of the machine influences the measured values and therefore also the optimization of a rotary axis For this reason there will always be a certain amount of error If there were no geometrical and positioning error any values measured by the cycle at any point on the machine at a certain time would be exactly reproducible The greater the geometrical and positioning error the greater is the dispersion of measured results when you fix the calibrating ball to different positions in the machine coordinate system The dispersion of results recorded by the TNC in the measuring log Is a measure of the machine s static tilting accuracy However the measuring circle radius and the number and position of measuring points have to be included in the evaluation of accuracy One measuring point alone is not enough to calculate dispersion For only one point the result of the calculation is the spatial error of that measuring point If several rotary axes are moved simultaneously their error values are combined In the worst case they are added together should activate the angle tracking using machine parameter MP6165 This generally increases the accuracy of measurements with a 3 D touch probe If your machine is equipped with a controlled spindle you If required deactivate the lock on the rotary axes for the duration of the calibration Otherwise it may falsify the results of measurement The machine tool
182. e measurement must be calibrated A calibration ball with an exactly known radius and sufficient rigidity must be attached to some position on the machine table Calibrations balls can be purchased trom various manufacturers of measuring equipment The kinematics description of the machine must be complete and correct The transtormation values must be entered with an accuracy of approx 1 mm All rotary axes must be NC axes KinematicsOpt does not support measurement of manual axes The complete machine geometry must be measured by the machine tool builder during commissioning Machine parameter MP6600 must define the tolerance limit starting from which the TNC displays a note in the Optimizing mode when the measured kinematic data is greater than this limit value see KinematicsOpt Tolerance limit in Optimization mode MP6600 on page 305 Machine parameter MP6601 must define the maximum permissible deviation from the entered cycle parameter by the calibration ball radius measured in the cycles see KinematicsOpt permissible deviation of the calibration ball radius MP6601 on page 305 18 2 Prerequisites HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 449 il G450 option _ SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO 18 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 option Cycle run With touch probe cycle 450 you can save the active machine kinematics restore a previously saved one or output the current saving status on the screen
183. e most recently defined machining cycle on the machining pattern you defined A machining pattern remains active until you define a new one or select a point table with the SEL PATTERN function You can use the mid program startup function to select any point at which you want to start or continue machining see User s Manual Test Run and Program Run sections 56 Select the Programming and Editing operating mode Select the functions for contour and point machining Using Canned Cycles il Defining individual machining positions LL LLI You can enter up to 9 machining positions Confirm each entry with the ENT key If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to LL O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece j surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle j POINT gt X coord of machining position absolute Enter X Example NC blocks A coordinate 5 gt Y coord of machining position absolute Enter Y nm coordinate n e gt Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin progrosieun Programming and editing fun sequence X coord of machining position Eo es ee 2 5 END PGM PLANE MM 0 y N r3 E INFO 173 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 57 il EF LLI E A INITION 2 3 Pattern Def Defining a single row ROW 58 If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then
184. e option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cya DIN ISO Position display in the tilted system On activation of Cycle 19 the displayed positions ACTL and NOML and the datum indicated in the additional status display are referenced to the tilted coordinate system The positions displayed immediately after cycle definition might not be the same as the coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle 19 Workspace monitoring The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system that are moved If necessary the TNC outputs an error message Positioning in a tilted coordinate system With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool while the coordinate system is tilted to positions that are referenced to the non tilted coordinate system Positioning movements with straight lines that are referenced to the machine coordinate system blocks with M91 or M92 can also be executed in a tilted working plane Constraints Positioning is without length compensation Positioning is without machine geometry compensation Tool radius compensation is not permitted 282 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Combining coordinate transformation cycles When combining coordinate transformation cycles always make sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum You can program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19 In this case you are shifting the machine based coordinate system If you program a datum sh
185. e programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between the touch probe and the workpiece enter a low estimate for the nominal diameter of the pocket or hole If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points The smaller the angle increment Q247 the less accurately the TNC can calculate the datum Minimum input value 5 Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 912 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the circular pocket or hole Enter a value that is more likely to be too small than too large Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range
186. easured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use See Saving the calculated datum page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G419 a ne IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO k i 15 barum IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 378 Call tool O to define the touch probe axis Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il a ne IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Center of circle X coordinate Center of circle Y coordinate Diameter of circle Polar coordinate angle for 1st touch point Stepping angle for calculating the starting points 2 to 4 Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Safety clearance in addition to MP6140 Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Do not move to clearance height between measuring points Set display Set the display in X to O Set the display in Y to 10 Without function since display is to be set Also set datum in the touch probe axis X coordinate of touch point Y coordinate of touch point Z coordinate of touch point Set the display in Z to 0 Pa
187. easuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR420 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program Is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start Q260 m X D 3 gcd D O T e zA A gt X lt Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 G421 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 421 measures the center and diameter of a hole or circular pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second
188. ected with SEL TABLE remains active until you select another datum table with SEL TABLE or through PGM MGT You can define datum tables and datum numbers in an NC block with the TRANS DATUM TABLE function HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G53 Example NC blocks 11 3 DATUM shift wi A ia tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO j il G53 11 3 DATUM shift witu tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO Editing the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change After you have changed a value in a datum table you must may not be included during program run Select the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager lens Display the datum tables Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and SHOW D Select the desired table or enter a new file name Edit the file The soft key row comprises the following functions for editing Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Go to previous page PAGE 48 5 v D Q m Go to next page Insert line only possible at end of table INSERT LINE Delete line DELETE LINE Confirm the entered line and go to the beginning of NEXT the next line i Add the entered number of lines reference points to P aPreno the end of the table N LINES da fe Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode In a program run mode you can select the active datu
189. ective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 m X D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO G415 G415 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 415 finds the intersection of two lines and defines it as the datum If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the first touch point 1 see figure at upper right that you have defined in the cycle The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction oppos
190. ectly with a cycle definition Use the TRANS DATUM RESET function Graphics If you program a new BLK FORM after a datum shift you can use MP 7310 to determine whether the BLK FORM is referenced to the current datum or to the original datum Referencing anew BLK FORM to the current datum enables you to display each part in a program in which several pallets are machined Status displays In the additional status display the following data from the datum table are shown Name and path of the active datum table Active datum number Comment from the DOC column of the active datum number HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G53 11 3 DATUM shift wi tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO j il 11 3 DATUM shift with datum tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 Please note while programming 264 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from the a datum table or a O parameter If you enter a Q parameter the TNC activates the datum number entered in the Q parameter Input range 0 to 9999 Selecting a datum table in the part program With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the TNC takes the datums To select the functions for program call press the Sale PGM CALL key Press the DATUM TABLE soft key Enter the complete path name of the datum table and confirm your entry with the END key Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum Shift A datum table sel
191. eeper inclination If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following way When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 perpendicular to the direction of the steepest inclination Please note while programming linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and fixtures Can occur From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation RO to the programmed positions If required use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 248 Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il Cycle parameters 231 m e Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd point in 1st axis Q228 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 t
192. eference axis direction 7 This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed 8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line 9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement Please note while programming Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the canned cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the setup clearance workpiece surface 2nd setup clearance and the rotational position that you defined in Cycle221 will be effective for the selected canned cycle The slot position O is not allowed if you use Cycle 254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221 172 Canned Cycles Pattern Definitions il Cycle parameters N Starting point 1st axis Q225 absolute Coordinate N of the starting point in the reference axis of the g working plane n gt Starting point 2nd axis Q226 absolute Coordinate O of the starting point in the minor axis of the working Y plane J Spacing in 1st axis Q237 incremental Spacing Z between each point on a line Q a Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 incremental Spacing between each line gt Number of columns 0242 Number of machining operations on a line gt Number of lines 0243 Number of passes Rotational position 0224 absolute Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center
193. eight between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF oO INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 413 il E o MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 ISO G426 16 10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 ISO G426 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 426 measures the position and width of a ridge If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 hen the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 1 The first probing is always in the negative direction of the programmed axis 3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next Starting position and probes the second touch point 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviation in the following Q parameters Q156 Actual value of measured length 0157 Actual value of the centerline Q166 Deviation of the measured length Please note while programming Before a
194. el Software and Features Function for superimposing coordinate transformations in the Program Run modes Function for adaptive feed rate control for optimizing the machining conditions during series production Touch probe cycles for inspecting and optimizing the machine accuracy Feature content level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level FCL upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Graphical depiction of the protected User s Manual space when DCM collision monitoring is active Handwheel superimposition in stopped User s Manual condition when DCM collision monitoring is active 3 D basic rotation set up Machine manual compensation Touch probe cycle for 3 D probing Page 439 Touch probe cycles for automatic datum Page 333 setting using the center of a slot ridge Feed rate reduction for the machining of User s Manual contour pockets with the tool being in full contact with
195. emental Distance between DATA workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Path overlap factor Q2 Q2 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 0001 to 1 9999 Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor O4 incremental Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate O5 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance O6 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height O7 absolute Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Inside corner radius O8 Inside corner rounding radius entered value is referenced to the path of the tool center Q8 is not a radius that is inserted as a separate contour element between programmed elements Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Direction of rotation Q9 Machining direction for pockets E Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island E Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and island Example NC blocks E Alternative PREDEF You can check the machining
196. en tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m X D 3 p D lt O za e a A G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 o i b i G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Mso 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 DIN ISO G264 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX Drilling 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate for plunging 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the setup clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached Countersinking at front 6 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front 7 The
197. entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Retraction feed rate O208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO G204 Cycle run This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the workpiece 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center distance 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the feed rate Z 7 for pre positioning until the tooth has reached the setup clearance Vy on the underside of the workpiece Gh yy 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches Wy Vf KAIT EZ on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate f
198. er of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be measured with stationary spindle To do so define the number of teeth CUT with O and adjust the machine parameter 6500 Refer to your machine manual HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G483 Measuring tool length and radius Cycle 33 or 483 ISO o Cycle parameters ae gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first g ti tool is to be measured for the first time or whethera time old format n E tool that has already been measured is to be ge inspected If the tool is being measured for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool radius R and the tool length L in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta values DR 0 and DL O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured data with the tool data stored in TOOL T The TNC calculates the deviations and enters them as positive or negative delta values DR and DL in TOOL T The deviations are also available in the Q parameters Q115 and Q116 If the delta values are greater than the permissible tool tolerances for wear or break detection the TNC will format lock the tool status L in TOOL 1 m x 2 3 2 D gt D D O m 5 D a O za D 5 Q 3 D D T g 5 ot S D 2 lt Q D et D ek gt D 5 a m D lt
199. er in the table in which the TNC is to save the determined basic rotation If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode The parameter has no effect if the misalignment is to be compensated by a rotation of the rotary table Q402 1 In this case the misalignment is not saved as an angular value Input range 0 to 2999 Basic rotation alignment 0402 Specify whether the TNC should compensate misalignment with a basic rotation or by rotating the rotary table 0 Set basic rotation 1 Rotate the rotary table When you select rotary table the TNC does not save the measured misalignment not even when you have defined a table line in parameter Q305 gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment The TNC sets the display to 0 only if you have defined Q402 1 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G401 14 3 BASIC SOTA from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO 2 ol 14 4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO G402 G402 Cycle run The Touch Probe Cycle 402 measures the centers of two studs Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in the working plane and the line connecting the two stud center
200. er the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the center of the pocket Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum Is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system MP6140 Q320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of t
201. erence point at slot center FCL 3 function Reference point at ridge center FCL 3 function Datum from inside of rectangle Datum from outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle hole Datum from outside of circle stud Datum from outside of corner Datum from inside of corner Datum from circle center Datum in touch probe axis Datum at center between four holes Datum in any one axis HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Page 390 Page 391 Page 435 Page 437 Page 439 Page 436 Page 483 Page 485 Page 487 Page 489 Page 310 Page 313 Page 316 Page 319 Page 322 Page 323 Page 333 Page 337 Page 340 Page 344 Page 348 Page 352 Page 356 Page 361 Page 365 Page 369 Page 371 Page 375 S il Overview Overview 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 430 431 440 441 450 451 452 480 481 482 483 484 496 Workpiece measure angle Workpiece measure hole center and diameter of hole Workpiece measure circle from outside diameter of circular stud Workpiece measure rectangle from inside Workpiece measure rectangle from outside Workpiece measure inside width slot Workpiece measure outside width ridge Workpiece measure in any selectable axis Workpiece measure bolt hole circle Workpiece measure plane Measure axis shift Rapid probing Set global touch probe parameters FCL 2 function KinematicsOpt Save kinematics option KinematicsOpt Measure kinematics option KinematicsOpt Preset c
202. ernatively PREDEF gt Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks 13 G267 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 _ fas The drill hole coordinates are stored in the point table TAB1 PNT and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL PAT The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be seen in the test graphics Program sequence Centering E Drilling E Tapping 4 11 Programmi examples 32 J O Q Q 3 3 Q D ras Q 3 D we Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition of center drill Drill tool definition Tool definition of tap Tool call of centering drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F The TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle Defining point tables Cycle definition CENTERING O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Feed rate between points 5000 mm min Retract the tool change the tool
203. essage bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool in the center of the pocket at rapid traverse to the first plunging depth Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Cycle parameters 251 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined First side length 0218 incremental Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 2nd side length 0219 incremental Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Corner radius Q220 Radius of the pocket corner If you have entered 0 here the TNC assumes that the corner radius is equal to the tool radius Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Angle of rotation Q224 absolute Angle by which the entire pocket is rotated The center of rota
204. et the reference point in the center of the calibrating ball and activate it For rotary axes without separate position encoders select the measuring points in such a way that you have to traverse a distance of 1 to the limit switch The TNC needs this distance for internal backlash compensation For the positioning feed rate when moving to the probing height in the touch probe axis the TNC uses the value from cycle parameter 0253 or machine parameter MP6150 whichever is smaller The TNC always moves the rotary axes at positioning feed rate 0253 while the probe monitoring is inactive If the kinematic data attained in the optimize mode are greater than the permissible limit MP6600 the TNC shows a warning Then you have to confirm acceptance of the attained value by pressing NC start Note that a change in the kinematics always changes the preset as well After an optimization reset the preset In every probing process the TNC first measures the radius of the calibrating ball If the measured ball radius differs from the entered ball radius by more than you have defined in machine parameter MP6601 the TNC shows an error message and ends the measurement If you interrupt the cycle during the measurement the kinematic data might no longer be in the original condition Save the active kinematic configuration before an optimization with Cycle 450 so that in case of a failure the most recently active kinematic configuration can be
205. eter for the hole circular pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G421 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO o il G421 m X D 3 O T e zA A 16 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO 398 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR421 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program Is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOO
206. etup clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool to the first plunging depth at rapid traverse HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253 DIN ISO C il G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle See Cycle parameters 253 148 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Slot length 0218 value parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter the length of the slot Input range O to 99999 9999 Slot width 0219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Maximum slot width for roughing Twice the tool diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Angle of rotation 0374 absolute Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle is called Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Slot position 0 1 2 3 4 Q367 Position of the slot in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0
207. etween tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF m x D 3 O T e zA A 72 Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISO G201 G201 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX 2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The tool then retracts to the setup clearance at the feed rate F and from there if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered lt A N O gt S g Z lt LLI as T ap Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his me
208. f rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated around the entered starting point Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the major axis of the machining plane is distorted around the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted around the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Example NC blocks Program run full sequence Programming and editing Starting point in X 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 0 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 40 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 52500 4 L Z 100 RO FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF FRAME1C EE 5 END PGM PLANE MM DIAGNOSIS aH aa ae Fa ete Ns Ae ts Using Canned Cycles Defining a full circle EF O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle CIRCLE Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of Example NC blocks the circle center in the X axis Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis LLI E A B
209. f the calculated backlash Repeatability of each linear axis 5 um Uncertainty of touch probe 2 um Logged measurement uncertainty 0 0002 um System uncertainty SORT 3 52 2 8 9 um Measurement uncertainty 0 0002 um 8 9 um 0 0018 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G451 option D ati KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO o il Touch probe cycle 452 optimizes the kinematic transformation chain of your machine see MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 option on page 452 Then the TNC corrects the workpiece coordinate system in the kinematics model in such a way that the current preset Is in the center of the calibration ball after optimization 18 5 PRESET COMPENSATION 2 Cycle 452 DIN ISO G452 Q option N Cycle run T g This cycle enables you for example to adjust different tool changer heads so that the workpiece preset applies for all heads 1 Clamp the calibration ball 2 Measure the complete reference head with Cycle 451 and use Cycle 451 to finally set the preset in the ball center 3 Insert the second head 4 Use Cycle 452 to measure the tool changer head up to the point where the head is changed 5 Use Cycle 452 to adjust other tool changer heads to the reference head ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO 00 q 466 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il If it is possible to leave the calibration ball clamped to the machine table during machining you c
210. f the first hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Ist hole Center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute Center of the first hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd hole Center in 1st axis 0270 absolute Center of the second hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd hole Center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute Center of the second hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Default setting for basic rotation Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il gt Preset number in table O305 Enter the preset numb
211. f the measuring surface of the TT you can measure the individual teeth of the tool while it is at standstill Cycle for measuring a tool during rotation The control determines the longest tooth of a rotating tool by positioning the tool to be measured at an offset to the center of the touch probe system and then moving it toward the measuring surface until it contacts the surface The offset is programmed in the tool table under Tool offset Radius TT R OFFS Cycle for measuring a tool during standstill e g for drills The control positions the tool to be measured over the center of the measuring surface It then moves the non rotating tool toward the measuring surface of the TT until it touches the surface To activate this function enter zero for the Tool offset Radius TT R OFFS in the tool table Cycle for measuring individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in MP6530 You can enter an additional offset with Tool offset Length TT L OFFS in the tool table The TNC probes the tool radially during rotation to determine the starting angle for measuring the individual teeth It then measures the length of each tooth by changing the corresponding angle of spindle orientation To activate this function program TCH PROBE 31 1 for CUTTER MEASUREMENT HEIDENHAIN ITNC
212. f the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Basic setting 0 gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m X D 3 p D Z O za e a A 15 7 DATUM _ OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 OO Ol Ol G414 15 8 DATUM a OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO 15 8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO G414 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 414 finds the intersection of two lines and defines itas the datum If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or
213. finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool moves in a reciprocating motion in the slot center at the plunging angle defined in the tool table to the first infeed depth Specify the plunging strategy with Parameter Q366 2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out taking the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 This process is repeated until the slot depth is reached Finishing 4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the slot walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The slot side is approached tangentially 5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside out The slot floor is approached tangentially HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle j il G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO 152 Please note while programming With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane with radius compensation R0 Define Parameter Q367 Reference for slot position appropriately The TNC runs the cycle in the axes machining plane with which you approached the starting position For example in Xand Y if you programmed CYCL CALL POS X Y or in U and V if you programmed CYCL CALL POS U V The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note P
214. for side into account 2 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed contour at the milling feed rate Q12 3 At the end of the contour the TNC returns the tool to the setup clearance and returns to the point of penetration 4 Steps 1 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 Then the tool moves to the setup clearance HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 led inl software option 1 N _ 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN SO G127 software option 1 Please note while programming 212 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il Cycle parameters ee Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between Example NC blocks the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled cylindrical surface This allowance is effective in the direction of the radius compensation Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance O6 incremental Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 d 177 software option 1 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 999
215. gle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 000 to 360 000 t by rotating the C ax Cycle 405 DIN ISO Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 000 to 120 000 ignmen Iece misa rkp 14 7 Compensatin HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 325 il is G405 Measuring height in the touch probe axis 0261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF MP6140 Q320 Example NC blocks Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move a
216. h The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between blank dimension 2 and finished dimension 2 is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank side length 2 0425 Length of the stud blank parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Corner radius Q220 Radius of the stud corner Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane is left over after machining Input range O to 99999 9999 Angle of rotation 0224 absolute Angle by which the entire stud is rotated The center of rotation is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle Is called Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stud position Q307 Position of the stud in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position Center of stud 1 Tool position Lower left corner 2 Tool position Lower right corner 3 Tool position Upper right corner 4 Tool position Upper left corner Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling
217. h probe axis The TNC always measures the first line in the direction of the minor axis of the working plane By defining the positions of the measuring points 1 and 3 you also determine the corner at which the TNC sets the datum see figure at right and table at lower right A Point 1 greater than Point 1 less than point 3 point 3 B Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 less than point 3 C Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 greater than point 3 D Point 1 greater than Point 1 greater than point 3 point 3 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G414 15 8 DATUM i iii OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO j il G414 15 8 DATUM pa OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 414 358 lst meas point lst axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Spacing in 1st axis 0326 incremental Distance between the first and second measuring points in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 1st axis Q296 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 2nd axis 0297 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the minor axis of the worki
218. he file type behind the program name As a rule Q parameters are globally effective when called with Cycle 12 So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program can also influence the calling program 292 CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL CYCL DEF 12 1 LOT31 9 M99 ooo eee ee eo eo we we we ww OF OR ORLO EOP OR Om ORO TO TOMTO OPO TONO 0 BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM END PGM _ 2_ 9 2 9 2 9 2 2 8 9 2 9 2 2 8 oe ee 0 ee eee 8 8 Cycles Special Functions il Cycle parameters 12 Program name Enter the name of the program you PGM CALL want to call and if necessary the directory It is located in A maximum of 254 characters can be entered The following functions can be used to call the defined program CYCL CALL separate block or CYCL CALL POS separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 executed after every positioning block HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G39 Example Designate program 50 as a cycle and call it with M99 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO 12 3 j i G36 INDLE STOP Cycle 13 DIN ISO LLJ lt cc O N N 12 4 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 DIN ISO G36 Cycle function The TNC can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given angular position Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle Oriented spindle stops are req
219. he measuring speed 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points Preset 0 1 2 3 0431 Specify whether the TNC is to set the active preset reference point automatically in the ball center 0 Do not set the preset automatically in the ball center Set the preset manually before the start of the cycle 1 Set the preset automatically in the ball center before measurement Preposition the touch probe manually over the calibration ball before the start of the cycle 2 Set the preset automatically in the ball center after measurement Set the preset manually before the start of the cycle 3 Set the preset in the ball center before and after measurement Preposition the touch probe manually over the calibration ball before the start of the cycle 1 3 then move the touch probe to a position above the If you have activated Preset before measurement 0431 center of the calibration ball before the start of the cycle _ KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 463 il Log function S After running Cycle 451 the TNC creates a measuring log O TCHPR451 TXT containing the following information O Creation date and time of the log Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run LO Mode used 0 Check 1 0ptimize D Active kinematic number ni Entered calibrating ball radius For each measured rotary axis Start angle End angle Angle of incidence Number of measuring points Measured
220. he surfaces A and B must be pockets E The first pocket in Cycle 14 must start outside the second pocket bh 84 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B E Surface A must be a pocket and B an island E A must start outside of B E B must start inside of A Surface A U vonseping contours urface B Area of intersection Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined E A and B must be pockets E A must start inside of B Surface A Surface B HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 o i G120 7 4 CONTOUR DATA ile 20 DIN ISO 74 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 DIN ISO G120 Please note while programming Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle 20 Cycle 20 is DEF active which means that It becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the TNC performs the cycle at the depth O The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for Cycles 21 to 24 If you are using the SL cycles in Q parameter programs the cycle parameters Q1 to O20 cannot be used as program parameters 186 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters J Milling depth Q1 incr
221. he working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the hole with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 35 a G412 LL gt lt A LO G413 15 7 DATUM mores OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO
222. hic simulation of the contour before execution If the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling The type of milling even remains effective when the contours are mirrored The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough milling and finish milling operations Please note while programming determines the working direction If you program The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The TNC takes only the first label of Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY into account The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is limited You can program up to 8192 contour elements in one SL cycle Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA is not required The miscellaneous functions M109 and M110 are not effective when machining a contour with Cycle 25 Danger of collision To avoid collisions Do not program positions in incremental dimensions immediately after Cycle 25 since they are referenced to the position of the tool at the end of the cycle Move the tool to defined absolute positions in all main axes since the position of the tool at the end of the cycle is not identical to the position of the tool at the start of the cycle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G125
223. hing in accordance with the measured values A 28 Prepare tool call Retract the tool Pocket length in X roughing dimension Pocket length in Y roughing dimension Call subprogram for machining Retract the tool change the tool Call the touch probe Measure the rough milled rectangle Nominal length in X final dimension Nominal length in Y final dimension Inout values for tolerance checking not required Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 No measuring log transmission Do not output an error message No tool monitoring Calculate length in X including the measured deviation Calculate length in Y including the measured deviation Retract the touch probe change the tool Tool call for finishing Call subprogram for machining Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram with fixed cycle for rectangular studs Length in X variable for roughing and finishing Length in Y variable for roughing and finishing Cycle call End of subprogram 429 16 14 Programming examples 16 14 Programming examples Tool call for touch probe Retract the touch probe Nominal length in X Nominal length in Y A 30 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 14 Programming examples HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Maximum limit in X Minimum limit in X Maximum limit in Y Minimum limit in Y Permissible posi
224. ift after having activated Cycle 19 you are shifting the tilted coordinate system Important When resetting the cycles use the reverse sequence used for defining them 1st Activate the datum shift 2nd Activate tilting function 3rd Activate rotation Machining 1st Reset the rotation 2nd Reset the tilting function 3rd Reset the datum shift Automatic workpiece measurement in the tilted system The TNC measuring cycles enable you to have the TNC measure a workpiece in a tilted system automatically The TNC stores the measured data in Q parameters for further processing for example for printout HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyo DIN ISO 7 il G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE cyciell DIN ISO Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 1 Write the program Define the tool not required if TOOL T is active and enter the full tool length Call the tool Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during tilting If required position the rotary axis or axes with an L block to the appropriate angular value s depending on a machine parameter Activate datum shift if required Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE enter the angular values for the rotary axes Traverse all principal axes X Y Z to activate compensation Write the program as if the machining process were to be e
225. igh estimate for the ridge width Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis LLJ a LLJ O Lu 9 as i LO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 337 il G409 FCL 3 function REF PT Cycle 409 DIN ISO LLJ b lt LLI O Ltd O as 2 LO q Cycle parameters 409 land 338 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the ridge in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the ridge in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Width of ridge 0311 incremental Width of the ridge regardless of its position in the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis 1 1st axis 2 2nd axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input
226. ighted see figure at right HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Programming and editing center in 1st axis FO 173 B TRL 13 1 H i Information about Touch Probe Cycles i il Defining the touch probe cycle in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The soft key row shows all available touch probe ies functions divided into groups Select the desired probe cycle for example datum setting Cycles for automatic tool measurement are available only if your machine has been prepared for them Select a cycle e g datum setting at pocket The TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks for all required input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Cycles for automatic measurement and Page 308 compensation of workpiece misalignment Cycles for automatic workpiece Page 330 presetting m x D 3 O T e zA A ral Information about Touch Probe Cycles Cycles for automatic workpiece Page 384 D inspection Calibration cycles special cycles rane Page 434 Cycles for automatic kinematics KINEMATI Page 448 measurement
227. in the Manual Operation mode MP6166 Set MP 6166 1 for the TNC to consider an active basic rotation during the probing process the workpiece is approached along an angular path if required to ensure that the measuring accuracy for probing individual positions is also increased in Setup mode This feature is not active during the following functions in the Manual Operation mode Calibrate length Calibrate radius Measure basic rotation Multiple measurement MP6170 To increase measuring certainty the TNC can run each probing process up to three times in sequence If the measured position values differ too greatly the TNC outputs an error message the limit value is defined in MP6171 With multiple measurement it is possible to detect random errors e g from contamination If the measured values lie within the confidence interval the TNC saves the mean value of the measured positions Confidence interval for multiple measurement MP6171 In MP6171 you store the value by which the results may differ when you make multiple measurements If the difference in the measured values exceeds the value in MP6171 the TNC outputs an error message 304 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Touch trigger probe probing feed rate MP6120 In MP6120 you define the feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning MP6150 In MP6150 you define the feed rate at which the TNC p
228. ine a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation R0 Note Parameter Q367 slot position The TNC runs the cycle in the axes machining plane with which you approached the starting position For example in Xand Y if you programmed CYCL CALL POS X Y or in U and V if you programmed CYCL CALL POS U V The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note Parameter Q204 2nd setup clearance At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting point slot center in the working plane Exception if you define a slot position not equal to 0 then the TNC only positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd setup clearance In these cases always program absolute traverse movements after the cycle call The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed If the slot width is greater than twice the tool diameter the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly from inside out You can therefore mill any slots with small tools too Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to s
229. ine the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Slot width Q219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Maximum slot width for roughing Twice the tool diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance In the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Pitch circle diameter Q375 Enter the diameter of the pitch circle Input range 0O to 99999 9999 Reference for slot position 0 1 2 3 0367 Position of the slot in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 The tool position is not taken into account The slot position is determined from the entered pitch circle center and the starting angle 1 Tool position Center of left slot circle Starting angle 0376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account 2 Tool position Center of center line Starting angle Q376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account 3 Tool position Center of right slot circle Starting angle 0376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account
230. ing the results of measurement For all cycles in which you automatically measure workpieces with the exception of Cycles 0 and 1 you can have the TNC record the measurement results In the respective probing cycle you can define if the TNC is to Save the measuring log to a file Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Create no measuring log If you want to save the measuring log as a file the TNC by default saves the measuring log as an ASCII file in the directory from which you run the measuring program As an alternative you can also send the measuring log directly to a printer or transfer it to a PC via the data interface To do this set the print function in the interface configuration menu to RS232 see also the User s Manual under MOD Functions Setting Up the Data Interface the datum active during the respective cycle you are running In addition the coordinate system may have been rotated in the plane or the plane may have been tilted by using 3D ROT In this case the TNC converts the measuring results to the respective active coordinate system Use the HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNCremo if you wish to output the measuring log via the data interface All measured values listed in the log file are referenced to HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 16 1 Fundamentals j il a er LL ae co q Example Measuring log for touch probe cycle
231. ing touch probe cycles 306 30 14 1 Fundamentals 308 Overview 308 Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment 309 14 2 BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO G400 310 Cycle run 310 Please note while programming 310 Cycle parameters 311 14 3 BASIC ROTATION from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO G401 cake Cycle run 313 Please note while programming 313 Cycle parameters 314 14 4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO G402 316 Cycle run 316 Please note while programming 316 Cycle parameters 317 14 5 BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO 6403 319 Cycle run 319 Please note while programming 319 Cycle parameters 320 14 6 SET BASIC ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO G40A4 322 Cycle run 322 Cycle parameters 322 14 7 Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis Cycle 405 DIN ISO G405 323 Cycle run 323 Please note while programming 324 Cycle parameters 325 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 31 il 15 1 Fundamentals 330 Overview 330 Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for datum setting 331 15 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 FCL 3 function 333 Cycle run 300 Please note while programming 334 Cycle parameters 334 15 3 RIDGE CENTER REF P
232. ion of spindle rotation again and advances to the next infeed depth 4 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 3 until the programmed thread depth is reached 5 The tool is then retracted to the setup clearance If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX 6 The TNC stops the spindle turning at setup clearance 108 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Digs G209 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 109 il G209 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Diso Cycle parameters 208 RT gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance Z2 between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 increme
233. irst center in 1st axis Q270 absolute center of the 2nd hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute center of the 2nd hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First center in 1st axis 0316 absolute center of the 3rd hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd center in 2nd axis 0317 absolute center of the 3rd hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4th center in 1st axis 0318 absolute center of the 4th hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4th center in 2nd axis 0319 absolute center of the 4th hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 ENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF lt A N LO 19 372 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Datum number in table Q305 Enter the n
234. ise with radius compensation RL E The subprograms must not contain spindle axis coordinates E The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram The secondary axes U V W are permitted in useful combinations Always define both axes of the machining plane in the first block E f you use Q parameters then only perform the calculations and assignments within the affected contour subprograms 178 Example Program structure Machining with SL cycles Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Characteristics of the canned cycles The TNC automatically positions the tool to the setup clearance before a cycle Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them In order to avoid leaving dwell marks the TNC inserts a globally definable rounding radius at non tangential inside corners The rounding radius which is entered in Cycle 20 affects the tool center point path meaning that it would increase a rounding defined by the tool radius applies to rough out and side finishing The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling With bit 4 in MP7420 you can
235. istance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF software option 1 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dimension type ang lin Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 8 5 CYLINDER SURFACE outside contour milling Cycle 39 DIN ISO 222 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il i N 8 6 Programming Examples ti Q Example Cylinder surface with Cycle 27 E i Note m m Machine with B head and C table e E Cylinder centered on rotary table Datum at center of rotary table Sen O Oo Son 0 Tool call Diameter 7 Retract the tool Pre position tool on rotary table center Positioning Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 223 il Pre position rotary table spindle ON call the cycle Retract the tool Tilt back cancel the PLANE fu
236. ite the respective traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The probing direction is derived from the number by which you identify the corner 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the coordinates of the determined corner in the Q parameters listed below 6 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of corner in reference axis O Y Z m O gt 2 cc LLI lt am O Q Li O LLI Y Z Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 361 il G415 15 9 DATUM INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC always measures the first line in the direction of the minor axis of the working plane Cycle parameters 415 362 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coor
237. ith Cycle 450 so that in case of a failure the most recently active kinematic configuration can be restored Programming in inches The TNC always records the log data and results of measurement in millimeters Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Cycle parameters asz gt Exact calibration sphere radius 0407 Enter the 2 exact radius of the calibrating ball used Input range 0 0001 to 99 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF G452 option Retraction height 0408 absolute Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 E Input O Do not move to any retraction height The TNC moves to the next measuring position in the axis to be measured Not allowed for Hirth axes The TNC moves to the first measuring position in the series A the B the then C E Input gt 0 Retraction height in the untilted workpiece coordinate system to which the TNC positions before a rotary axis positioning in the spindle axis Also the TNC moves the touch probe in the working plane to the datum The probe monitoring is not active in this mode Define the positioning velocity in parameter Q253 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool during positioning in mm min Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF gt Reference angle Q380 absolute
238. ition program is called through the SEL CONTOUR function in the actual main program 6 The following programming examples are contour Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S1 and S2 they do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles 232 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il O O 5 5 or or oO Oo f am f am oe Q 4 gt 4 gt N O Ke Ke O O 5 5 D D oO oO o 9 3 3 N Ke ge N 4 gt 4 gt or or wo gt Complex Contour Formula Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area E The surfaces A and B must be programmed in separate programs without radius compensation E In the contour formula the surfaces A and B are processed with the joined with function Contour definition program HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 T O gt Q l Y 0 j i Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B E The surfaces A and B must be entered in separate programs without radius compensation E In the contour formula the surface B is subtracted from the surface A with the joined with complement of function Contour definition program Complex Contour Formula gt D D e 5 na D V D O ap e Only the area where A a
239. itions the calibrating tool at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 and following the positioning logic refer to chapter 1 2 in the vicinity of the TT 2 At first the TNC makes a measurement in the touch probe axis The calibrating tool is offset by the value you have defined in the tool table TOOL T under TT R OFFS standard tool radius The TNC always performs the measurement in the touch probe axis 3 Then the TNC makes the measurement in the working plane You define via parameter Q364 in which axis and in which direction of the working plane the measurement is to be made 4 lf you make a calibration the TNC saves the calibration data Whenever you make a measurement the TNC compares the measured values to the calibration data and writes the deviations to the following Q parameters Q185 Deviation from calibration value in X Q186 Deviation from calibration value in Y 0187 Deviation from calibration value in Z You can use this value for compensating the deviation through an incremental datum shift Cycle 7 5 Finally the calibrating tool returns to the clearance height HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G440 E AXIS SHIFT touch probe cycle 440 DIN ISO lt ir _ o il 17 6 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT touch probe cycle 440 DIN ISO G440 Please note while programming 442 Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il Cycle parameters 1 2 gt Operation O calibr 1 measure Q363 Specify whethe
240. itor for tool breakage see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range O to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m X D 3 po D Z O 2a e a A EAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 423 il G431 16 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO 16 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO G431 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 431 finds the angle of a plane by measuring three points It saves the measured values in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the programmed Starting point 1 and measures the first touch point of the plane The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite to the direction of probing The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves in the working plane to starting point 2 and measures the actual value of the second touch point of the plane The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves in the working plane to starting point 3 and measures the actual value of the third touch point Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured angle values in the following O parameters 0158 Projection angle of the A axis Q159 Projection
241. ive This means that the TNC runs the cycle automatically as soon as the TNC executes the cycle definition in the program run compensation data length radius from the calibrated data or from the last TOOL CALL block are active selection via MP7411 see the User s Manual of the ITNC530 General User Parameters Make sure that at the beginning of the cycle the You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419 during an active basic rotation Make sure however that the basic rotation angle does not change when you use Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables after the measuring cycle Touch probe cycles with a number greater than 400 position the touch probe according to a positioning logic If the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is less than the coordinate of the clearance height defined in the cycle the TNC retracts the touch probe in the probe axis to the clearance height and then positions it in the working plane to the first starting position If the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is greater than the coordinate of the clearance height the TNC first positions the probe in the working plane to the first starting position and then moves It immediately to the measuring height in the touch probe axis 13 2 efori Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 306 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment i 14 1 Fundamen
242. l Y ae LO Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a low estimate for the slot width If the slot width and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the slot In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the two measuring points Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 408 aod 334 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Input MP6140 range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Width of slot 0311 incremental Width of the slot regardless of its position in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring axis 1 1st axis 2 2nd axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball
243. l drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the setup clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX 4 The TNC stops the spindle turning at setup clearance HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Cycle 207 SO G207 DI tap holder NE 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating j il SO G207 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 D Please note while programming 106 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Cycle parameters 207 RT e e gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Total hole depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can oc
244. l not be damaged by entering a rotary axis tolerance value Only the position of the rotary axis with respect to the workpiece surface will change Input range O to 179 9999 5 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO your machine you have software option 2 active HSC The HSC MODE and TA parameters are only available if on machining 298 Cycles Special Functions il Using Touch Probe Cycles 13 1 General Information about Touch Probe Cycles The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe The machine tool manual provides further information Q If you are carrying out measurements during program run be sure that the tool data length radius can be used from the calibrated data or from the last TOOL CALL block selected with MP7411 O Method of function Whenever the TNC runs a touch probe cycle the 3 D touch probe approaches the workpiece in one linear axis This is also true during an active basic rotation or with a tilted working plane The machine tool builder determines the probing feed rate in a machine parameter see Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles later in this chapter When the probe stylus contacts the workpiece the 3 D touch probe transmits a signal to the TNC the coordinates of the probed position are stored the touch probe stops moving and returns to its starting position at rapid traverse N gt Q o 2 Oo
245. lengths of the 1st and 2nd sides Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length 0323 incremental Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length 0324 incremental Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 MP6140 G411 15 5 DATUM FROM i OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO f il G411 IDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO 15 5 DATUM FROM Ot 346
246. ling feed rate Q12 tangentially to the ridge wall If so programmed it will leave metal for the finishing allowance 3 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed ridge wall at the milling feed rate Q12 until the stud is completed 4 The tool then departs the ridge wall on a tangential path and returns to the starting point of machining 5 Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle depending on machine parameter 7420 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G129 software option 1 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge a i 29 DIN ISO C il Please note while programming L uodo 3Jemyos 6ZLD OSI NIC 62 31049 Bun e6pu JOVAYNS YJANITAI v 8 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 218 Cycle parameters Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between Example NC blocks the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance on the ridge wall The finishing allowance Increases the ridge width by twice the entered value Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance O6 incremental Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF G129 software option 1 gt P
247. lly for machine calibration Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you have any questions in this regard HEIDENHAIN recommends using the HEIDENHAIN The TNC evaluates the static tilting accuracy The software minimizes the spatial error arising from the tilting movements and at the end of the measurement process automatically saves the machine geometry in the respective machine constants of the kinematics description 1 Clamp the calibration ball and check for potential collisions 2 In the Manual Operation mode set the reference point in the ball center or if Q431 1 or Q431 3 is defined In the touch probe axis manually position the touch probe over the calibration ball and in the working plane over the ball center 3 Select the Program Run mode and start the calibration program 4 The TNC automatically measures all three axes successively in the resolution you defined 452 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il 5 Finally the TNC returns the rotary axes to the initial position and saves the measured values and deviations in the following O parameters Q141 Q142 Q143 Q144 Q145 Q146 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Standard deviation measured in the A axis 1 if axis was not measured Standard deviation measured in the B axis 1 if axis was not measured Standard deviation measured in the C axis 1 if axis was not measured Optimized standard deviation in the A axis 1 if axis was
248. locks 2S m 3 9 BORE MILLING T 208 G241 3 10 SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO 3 10 SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO G241 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX Then the TNC moves the tool at the defined positioning feed rate to the setup clearance above the deepened starting point and switches on the drilling soeed M3 and the coolant The tool drills to the entered drilling depth at the programmed feed rateF If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for chip breaking Then the TNC switches off the coolant and resets the drilling speed to the value defined for retraction After the dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is rectracted to the setup clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX Please note while programming center in the working plane with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point hole The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an 94 error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculatio
249. lot 1D 533 191 xx Software options The ITNC 530 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions TNC Model Software and Features Cylinder surface interpolation Cycles 27 28 29 and 39 Feed rate in mm min for rotary axes M116 Tilting the machining plane Cycle 19 PLANE function and 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane Block processing time 0 5 ms instead of 3 6 ms 5 axis interpolation Spline interpolation 3 D machining M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with swivel axes M128 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with swivel axes TCPM FUNCTION TCPM Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with swivel axes TCPM in selectable modes M144 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Additional parameters for finishing roughing and tolerance for rotary axes in Cycle 32 G62 LN blocks 3 D compensation Function which dynamically monitors areas defined by the machine manufacturer to prevent collisions Function for enabling the conversational languages Slovenian Slovak Norwegian Latvian Estonian Korean Turkish Romanian Lithuanian Extract contours from DXF files R12 format HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 TNC Mod
250. lunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cycle 29 DIN ISO gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dimension type ang lin Q17 The dimensions for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 gt Ridge width Q20 Width of the ridge to be machined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 N co G139 software option 1 8 5 CYLINDER SURFACE outside contour milling Cycle 39 DIN ISO 8 5 CYLINDER SURFACE outside contour milling Cycle 39 DIN ISO G139 software option 1 Cycle run This cycle enables you to program an open contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3 D machining With this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the wall of the open contour is always parallel to the cylinder axis Unlike Cycles 28 and 29 in the contour subprogram you define the actual contour to be machined 1 The TNC positions the tool over the
251. m table Press the DATUM TABLE soft key You can then use the same editing functions as in the Programming and Editing mode of operation 266 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Transferring the actual values into the datum table You can enter the current tool position or the last probed position in the datum table by pressing the actual position capture key Place the text box on the line of the column in which you want to enter the position Select the actual position capture function The TNC opens a pop up window that asks whether you want to enter the current tool position or the last probed values Select the desired function with the arrow keys and confirm your selection with the ENT key mA To enter the values in all axes press the ALL VALUES aoe soft key mere To enter the value in the axis where the text box is GU located press the CURRENT VALUE soft key HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G53 11 3 DATUM shift wi A ia tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO j il G53 latum tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO 3 ir T lt m Configuring the datum table In the second and third soft key rows you can define for each datum table the axes for which you wish to set the datums In the standard setting all of the axes are active If you wish to exclude an axis set the corresponding soft key to OFF The TNC then deletes that column from the datum table If you do not wish to define a datum table for an active
252. manual provides further information HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 457 G451 option EASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 18 7 Notes on various calibration methods 2 Rough optimization during commissioning after entering kaS approximate dimensions Oo Number of measuring points between 1 and 2 Eate Angular step of the rotary axes Approx 90 LO Fine optimization over the entire range of traverse D Number of measuring points between 3 and 6 The start and end angles should cover the largest possible traverse range of the rotary axes Position the calibrating ball on the machine table so that on rotary table axes there is a large measuring circle or so that on swivel head axes the measurement can be made at a representative position e g in the center of the traverse range Optimization of a specific rotary axis position Number of measuring points between 2 and 3 The measurements are made near the rotary axis angle at which the workpiece is to be machined Position the calibration ball on the machine table for calibration at the position subsequently intended for machining Inspecting the machine accuracy Number of measuring points between 4 and 8 The start and end angles should cover the largest possible traverse range of the rotary axes Determining the rotary axis backlash during inspection Number of measuring points between 8 and 12 The start and end angles should cover the largest possible traverse range of the rota
253. mbient conditions If the drift remains sufficiently constant over the range of traverse and if the calibration ball can be left on the machine table during machining the drift can be measured and compensated with Cycle 452 Clamp the calibration ball Insert the touch probe Measure the complete kinematics with Cycle 451 before starting the machining process gt Set the preset using 0432 2 or 3 in Cycle 451 after measuring the kinematics Then set the presets on your workpieces and start the machining process HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G452 option O E 53 Ta p eB so D 5 O D 3 D c o 3 D 5 p h o r ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO 00 q i i G452 option ESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO 00 q Measure the drift of the axes at regular intervals Insert the touch probe Activate the preset in the calibration ball Use Cycle 452 to measure the kinematics The preset and the position of the calibration ball must not be changed during the complete process This procedure can also be performed on machines without rotary axes 474 m x D a D J O fe 3 D 3 fet 5 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Log function After running Cycle 452 the TNC creates a measuring log TCHPR452 TXT containing the followi
254. meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point lst axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement Is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis Q263 0265 Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance Q320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF MP6140 Q320 O2 72 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalig
255. message gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m x D 3 O za e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 8 MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE Cycle 424 ISO G424 G424 5 8 MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE Cycle 424 ISO Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 424 finds the center length and width of a rectangular stud If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3
256. meters 479 Measuring tool length and radius 489 Tool length 485 Tool radius 487 Tool monitoring 388 Touch probe cycles Touch probe cycles for automatic operation 302 U Universal drilling 79 87 W Width measuring from inside 411 Width measuring from outside 414 Workpiece measurement 384 Overview Machining cycles 7 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2J 28 29 30 32 39 200 201 Page 73 202 Page 75 203 Datum shift Dwell time Rotation Program call Contour definition Pilot drilling SL Il Contour train Cylinder surface Cylinder surface ridge Tolerance Drilling Reaming Boring HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Page 262 Mirror image Page 270 Page 291 Page 272 Page 274 Scaling factor Page 292 Oriented spindle stop Page 294 Page 181 Tilting the working plane Page 278 Contour data SL Il Page 186 Page 188 Rough out SL Il Page 190 Floor finishing SL Il Page 194 Page 195 Side finishing SL Il Page 197 Page 276 Axis specitic scaling Page 211 Cylindrical surface slot Page 214 Page 217 Page 243 Run 3 D data Page 295 Page 220 Cylinder surface external contour Page 71 Universal drilling i il Page 79 Overview Overview 204 205 206 207 208 209 220 221 230 231 232 240 241 247 251 252 253 254 256 257 262 263 264 265 267 270 494 Back boring
257. moves in the direction of the next end point 2 The milling process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd setup clearance 252 Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il Please note while programming Enter the 2nd setup clearance in 0204 so that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur Cycle parameters 232 Machining strategy 0 1 2 Q389 Specify how the TNC is to machine the surface 0 Meander machining stepover at positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 1 Meander machining stepover at feed rate for milling within the surface to be machined 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999
258. n Enter the rotation angle in degrees Input range 360 000 to 360 000 absolute or incremental HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G73 MeO TATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO C i G72 A scaune Cycle 11 DIN ISO 11 7 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO G72 Effect The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor has an effect on the working plane or on all three coordinate axes at the same time depending on MP 7410 dimensions in cycles the parallel axes U V W Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour Enlargement SCL greater than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Resetting Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 274 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters G72 gt Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The Example NC blocks TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Effect above Input range 0 000000 to 99 999999 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO HE
259. n MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Inout mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip Is parallel to a coordinate axis During retraction the TNC automatically takes an active rotation of the coordinate system into account Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 202 Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring at mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting fr
260. n a TOOL CALL block In narrow areas the TNC may not be able to carry out pilot drilling with a tool that is larger than the rough out tool 188 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters G121 21 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Dimension by which the tool drills in each infeed negative sign for negative working direction Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q11 Drilling feed rate in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Rough out tool number name Q13 or OS13 Number or name of rough out tool Input range O to 32767 9 if a number is entered maximum 16 characters if a name is entered 21 DIN ISO Example NC blocks 9 zZ cc m A LO N HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 189 il G122 7 6 ROUGH OUT ae 22 DIN ISO 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 Cycle run 1 2 190 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account In the first plunging depth the tool mills the contour from the inside outward at the milling feed rate Q12 The island contours here C D are cleared out with an approach toward the pocket contour here A B In the next step the TNC moves the tool to the next plunging depth and repeats the roughing procedure until the program depth is reached Finally the TNC retracts the tool to the clearance height Canned Cycles Con
261. n for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Deepened starting point Q379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position for actual drilling operation The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the setup clearance to the deepened starting point Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the setup clearance to the dee
262. n machined 1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position stud center in the positive X direction to the starting position for the stud machining The starting position is 2 mm to the right of the unmachined stud If the tool is at the 2nd setup clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves tangentially on a semicircle to the stud contour and machines one revolution If the finished diameter cannot be machined with one revolution the TNC performs a stepover with the current factor and machines another revolution The TNC takes the dimensions of the workpiece blank diameter the finished diameter and the permitted stepover into account This process is repeated until the defined finished diameter has been reached The tool then tangentially departs the contour on a semicircle and returns to the starting point for the stud machining The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth and machines the stud at this depth This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth Is reached 160 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 25 NSO G257 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 161 il G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle os MEIN ISO Cycle parameters 162 Finished part diameter 0223 Diameter of the completel
263. n mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 14 Ol G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle Da i G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253 DIN ISO G253 Cycle run Use Cycle 253 to completely machine a slot Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 Starting from the left slot arc center the tool moves in a reciprocating motion at the plunging angle defined in the tool table to the first infeed depth Specify the plunging strategy with Parameter O366 2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out taking the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 This process is repeated until the slot depth is reached Finishing 4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the slot walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The slot side is approached tangentially in the right slot arc 5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside out The slot floor is approached tangentially 146 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot def
264. n order to write basic rotations to the preset table see page 322 Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419 The TNC now also writes to line O of the preset table when the display value is set see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 Touch Probe Cycle 412 Additional parameter Q365 type of traverse see DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 on page 348 Touch Probe Cycle 413 Additional parameter Q365 type of traverse see DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 on page 352 Touch Probe Cycle 416 Additional parameter Q320 setup clearance see DATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO G416 page 365 Touch Probe Cycle 421 Additional parameter 0365 type of traverse see MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 on page 395 Touch Probe Cycle 422 Additional parameter Q365 type of traverse see MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 on page 399 Touch Probe Cycle 425 MEASURE SLOT was expanded by parameters Q301 Move to clearance height and Q320 setup clearance see MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 page 411 Touch Probe Cycle 450 SAVE KINEMATICS was expanded by input option 2 Display saving status in parameter 0410 mode see SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 option on page 450 Touch Probe Cycle 451 MEASURE KINEMATICS was expanded by parameters 0423 Number of circular measurements and 0432 Set preset
265. n you activate the datum that you last set in a manual operating mode Cycle 247 is not functional in Test Run mode Cycle parameters 247 Number for datum Enter the number of the datum to wu be activated from the preset table Input range O to 65535 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G247 O Y Z m N N gt g Z 11 4 DATU Example NC blocks j il G28 11 5 mor IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO 11 5 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO G28 Effect The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane The mirror image cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display If you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in canned cycles If you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirror image depends on the location of the datum If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the element simply flips over If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location Resetting Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT Please note while programming reversed for the milling cycles Cycles 2xx Exception Cycle 208 in which the direction defined in the cycle applies If you mirror only one
266. nction End of program Contour subprogram Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 FB programming Examples N 24 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il Examples Notes E Cylinder centered on rotary table Machine with B head and C table E Datum at center of rotary table O E Description of the midpoint path in the contour subprogram Sem O O Sem A Tool call tool axis Y diameter 7 Retract the tool Position tool on rotary table center Positioning Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Remachining active HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 225 il Pre position rotary table spindle ON call the cycle Retract the tool Tilt back cancel the PLANE function End of program Contour subprogram description of the midpoint path Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 Programming Examples N 26 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula Fundamentals SL cycles and the complex contour formula enable you to form complex contours by combining subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours geometry data as separate programs In this way any subcontour can be used any number of times The TNC calculates the complete contour from the selected subcontours which you link together through a contour formula
267. nd B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined E The surfaces A and B must be entered in separate programs without radius compensation E In the contour formula the surfaces A and B are processed with the intersection with function Contour definition program 9 1 SL Cycles Contour machining with SL Cycles The complete contour is machined with the SL Cycles 20 to 24 see Overview on page 180 N 34 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition of roughing cutter Tool definition of finishing cutter Tool call of roughing cutter Retract the tool Specify contour definition program Define general machining parameters Cycle definition Rough out 235 Complex Contour Formula T O gt Q l Y 0 Complex Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles O O mD r O C y O D e O mD oc O Ke 3 a Q O D gt ct O C y O i c a N 36 Cycle call Rough out Tool call of finishing cutter Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program Contour Definition Program Definition of the contour designator for the prog
268. nd the number of contour descriptions You can program up to 16384 contour elements The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all Properties of the subcontours E By default the TNC assumes that the contour is a pocket Do not program a radius compensation The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call E Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the spindle axis such coordinates are ignored E The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram The secondary axes U V W are permitted 238 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il Characteristics of the canned cycles The TNC automatically positions the tool to the setup clearance before a cycle Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for tool axis Z f
269. nd the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m X D 3 p D O za e o A 12 ou G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 _ G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 Mso 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 DIN ISO G265 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX Countersinking
270. ng a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT The CYCL CALL PAT function calls the most recently defined canned cycle at all positions that you defined ina PATTERN DEF pattern definition see Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF on page 55 or ina point table see Point Tables on page 63 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 2 1 Working with Canned sa 2 1 Working with Canned Pies Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL POS The CYCL CALL POS function calls the most recently defined canned cycle once The starting point of the cycle is the position that you defined in the CYCL CALL POS block The TNC moves using positioning logic to the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block If the current position in the tool axis is greater than the top surface of the workpiece Q203 the TNC moves the tool to the programmed position first in the machining plane and then in the tool axis If the current tool position in the tool axis is below the top surface of the workpiece Q203 the TNC moves the tool to the programmed position first in the tool axis to the clearance height and then in the working plane to the programmed position CYCL CALL POS block With the coordinate in the tool axis you can easily change the starting position It serves as an additional datum shift The feed rate most recently defined in the CYCL CALL POS block applies only for traverse to the start position programmed in this block Three coordinate axes must always be programmed in the
271. ng information Creation date and time of the log Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run Active kinematic number Entered calibrating ball radius For each measured rotary axis Start angle End angle Angle of incidence Number of measuring points Measured dispersion measured standard deviation Optimized dispersion optimized standard deviation Ascertained backlash Averaged positioning error Measuring circle radius Compensation values in all axes Value of preset compensation Measurement uncertainty of rotary axes Notes on log data see Notes on log data on page 464 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G452 option RESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO bili 7 f P I i Measurement Touch Probe Cycles k a Automatic Tool 19 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC and the machine tool must be set up by the i machine tool builder for use of the TT touch probe Some cycles and functions may not be provided on your machine tool Refer to your machine manual In conjunction with the TNC s tool measurement cycles the tool touch probe enables you to measure tools automatically The compensation values for tool length and radius can be stored in the central tool file TOOL T and are accounted for at the end of the touch probe cycle The following types of tool measurement are provided 19 1 Fundamentals Tool measurement while the tool is at standstill Tool measurement while the t
272. ng plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Spacing in 2nd axis 0327 incremental Distance between third and fourth measuring points in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Execute basic rotation Q304 Definition of whether the TNC should compensate workpiece misalignment with a basic rotation 0 No basic rotation 1 Basic rotation Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the corner If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the displ
273. nking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 _ N G267 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 Diso 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 DIN ISO G267 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX Countersinking at front 2 5 The TNC moves in the reference axis of the working plane from the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking at front The position of the starting point is determined by the thread radius tool radius and pitch The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking The tool then moves on a semicircle to the starting point Thread milling 6 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has been no previous countersinking at front Starting point for thread milling starting point for countersinking at front The tool move
274. nment il Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Axis for compensation motion 0312 assignment of the rotary axis in which the TNC is to compensate the measured misalignment 4 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis A 5 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis B 6 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis C gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the preset table datum table in which the TNC is to set the rotary axis to zero Only effective if 0337 is set to 1 Input range O to 2999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify if the determined basic rotation is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 0 Write the measured basic rotation as a datum shift in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write the mea
275. nput range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made over the width Input range O to 99999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving from setup clearance to the milling depth in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Stepover feed rate Q209 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely in the material enter Q209 to be smaller than Q207 If you are moving it transversely in the open Q209 may be greater than Q207 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at the start and end of the cycle Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF MIE 2207 Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 4 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 DIN ISO G231 Cycle run 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 3 From this point the tool moves at rapid traverse FMAX by the tool diameter in the positive tool axis direction and then back to starting point 1
276. ns that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool in the center of the pocket at rapid traverse to the first plunging depth HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 252 DIN ISO b il G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle See Cycle parameters 252 144 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Circle diameter 0223 Diameter of the finished pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than O Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q309 incremental Finishing all
277. ns the touch probe to the programmed starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and moves the rotary axis which was defined in the cycle by the measured value Optionally you can have the display set to O after alignment Please note while programming Danger of collision You can now also use Cycle 403 when the Tilt the working plane function is active Ensure that the clearance height is sufficiently large so that no collisions can occur during the final positioning of the rotary axis The TNC does not check whether touch points and compensation axis match This can result in compensation movements offset by 180 tool call to define the touch probe axis Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a The TNC stores the measured angle in parameter Q150 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G403 tary axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO 14 5 BASIC i i compensation via ro j il G403 tary axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO ION Via ro 14 5 BASIC ROTATION compensat Cycle parameters 403 Cos 320 lst
278. ntal Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 The TNC multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed value and retracts the tool by the calculated value during chip breaking If you enter Q256 0 the TNC retracts the tool completely from the hole to the setup clearance for chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before machining the thread This allows you to regroove the thread if required Inout range 360 0000 to 360 0000 gt RPM factor for retraction 0403 Factor by which the TNC increases the spindle soeed and therefore also the retraction feed rate when retracting from the drill hole Inout range 0 0001 to 10 rom is increased at most to the maximum speed of the active gear range Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft key If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis 110 N YA YTE ANN C a Example NC blocks Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 5 Fundamentals of thread milling Prerequisites Your machine tool should feature internal spin
279. o enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 hen the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters 0303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below 6 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis 0152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter 348 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note whil
280. o 99999 9999 2nd point in 2nd axis Q229 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the spindle axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 1st axis Q231 absolute Coordinate of point 3 in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 2nd axis Q232 absolute Coordinate of point 3 in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 3rd axis Q233 absolute Coordinate of point 3 in the spindle axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 _ ao Q231 Q234 0225 G231 X 10 4 RULED a Cycle 231 DIN ISO i il G231 m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A 10 4 RULED sufhce Cycle 231 DIN ISO 250 gt Ath point in 1st axis 0234 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 4th point in 2nd axis Q235 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 4th point in 3rd axis Q236 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the spindle axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made between
281. o 99999 9999 Countersinking depth 0356 incremental Distance between tool point and the top surface of the workpiece Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Inout range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF O Q Ol Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF AM ld NAR ARAARAR Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF cos N SSeS Setup clearance to the side 0357 incremental Distance between tool tooth and the wall of the hole Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 y N N77 Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 118 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision betwe
282. o the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The TNC repeats steps 3 and 4 for the holes 3 and 4 6 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 The TNC calculates the datum as the intersection of the lines connecting the centers of holes 1 3 and 2 4 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below 7 f desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of intersection point in reference axis O Y Z A 00 Q gt Y LLJ al O L LL O as LLJ lt LLJ 0152 Actual value of intersection point in minor axis 15 12 DATUM HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 371 il Please note while programming G418 tool call to define the touch probe axis Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a Cycle parameters First center in 1st axis Q268 absolute center of the 1st hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute center of the 1st hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 F
283. of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 027329279 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF G424 6 8 MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE Cycle 424 ISO Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Q274 0280 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring Q273 9279 points Alternatively PREDEF Max size limit 1st side length 0284 Maximum permissible length of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 1st side length Q285 Minimum permissible length of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Max size limit 2nd side length Q286 Maximum permissible width of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 2nd side length 0287 Minimum permissible width of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 MP6140 Tolerance for center 1st axis 0279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the w
284. oints 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the center of the pocket Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axi
285. ol length 388 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Tool breakage monitoring The TNC will output an error message and stop program run if the measured deviation is greater than the breakage tolerance of the tool At the same time the tool will be deactivated in the tool table column TL L Reference system for measurement results The TNC transfers all the measurement results to the result parameters and the protocol file in the active coordinate system or as the case may be the shifted or and rotated tilted coordinate system HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 er O LL ae fe q j i G55 16 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO 16 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO G55 Cycle run 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle 2 Then the touch probe approaches the workpiece at the feed rate assigned in MP6120 or MP6360 The probing direction is to be defined in the cycle 3 After the TNC has saved the position the probe retracts to the starting point and saves the measured coordinate in a Q parameter The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in the parameters Q115 to Q119 For the values in these parameters the TNC does not account for the stylus length and radius Please note while programming Danger of collision Pre position the touch pro
286. ol to safety clearance and move to the starting point of the next area to be rough milled HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G122 7 6 ROUGH OUT a 22 DIN ISO i il G123 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING ele 23 DIN ISO 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 DIN ISO G123 Cycle run The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly on a vertically tangential arc if there is sufficient room If there is not enough room the TNC moves the tool to depth vertically The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough out Please note while programming finishing The starting point depends on the available The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for space in the pocket The approaching radius for pre positioning to the final depth is permanently defined and independent of the plunging angle of the tool Cycle parameters 23 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the Lae tool during plunging Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for roughing O12 Milling feed rate Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q12 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF 194 Example NC blocks Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il 78 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 DIN ISO G124 Cycle
287. ol types Drill End mill with diameter of no function 4 4 teeth Breakage tolerance radius O no offset required because tool tip is to be measured O no additional offset O no offset required because lt 19 mm 4 4 teeth tool diameter is smaller than the contact plate diameter of the TT required for radius calibration offset from MP6530 is used O no additional offset End mill with diameter of gt 19 Mmm Radius cutter 4 4 teeth R offset required because tool diameter is larger that the contact plate diameter of the TT O no offset required because the south pole of the ball is to required for radius calibration offset from MP6530 is used 5 always define the tool radius as the offset so that B be measured the diameter is not measured in the radius HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 i il Display the results of measurement You can display the results of tool measurement in the additional Program run full sequence Progressing status display in the machine operating modes The TNC then shows the program blocks in the left and the measuring results in the right 29 CVCE DEF 11 9 SCALING ERE T o screen window The measuring results that exceed the permissible A boc am wear tolerance are marked in the status display with an asterisk 2 cek tats ers B rax 27 LBL DYN the results that exceed the permissible breakage tolerance are ma
288. olt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle Program run full sequence Programming and editing Bolt hole circle center X INITION Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining position Reference axis Major axis of the active 2 BLK FORM 0 2 xsioo V100 Zeca machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter ts PATTERN DEF CIRC1C a positive or negative value 5 END PEM PLANE MM Number of positions Total number of machining positions on the circle Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin T sais Pouca INFO 173 2 3 Pattern Def HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 61 il Defining a circular arc EF O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to Ser Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of Example NC blocks the circle center in the X axis LLI E A Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis gt Bolt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle INITION Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining Proson oun Programming and editing position Reference axis Major axis of the active Bolt hole circle center X machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter 2 BLK FoR 0 2 xioa Vro Z 40 a positive
289. om the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging Inout range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Z m N N gt 9 lt cc Q aa LO gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the hole bottom after spindle orientation G202 0 Do not retract tool 1 Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the neg minor axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the pos minor axis direction gt Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before retracting it Input range 360 000 to 360 000 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO m x D 3 p D 78 Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the
290. omatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone trom MP6540 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF mi x lt 3 D lt O 2a e O V 5 gt D g h fet an Cutter measurement 0 No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth 19 5 Measuring the tool radius Cycle 32 or 482 ISO 488 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il 19 6 Measuring tool length and radius Cycle 33 or 483 ISO G483 Cycle run To measure both the length and radius of a tool program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 33 or TCH PROBE 482 See also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 479 This cycle is particularly suitable for the first measurement of tools as it saves time when compared with individual measurement of length and radius In input parameters you can select the desired type of measurement Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC measures the tool in a fixed programmed sequence First it measures the tool radius then the tool length The sequence of measurement is the same as for measuring cycles 31 and 32 Please note while programming following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the numb
291. ompensation option Calibrating the TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool radius Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Calibrate infrared TT Page 392 Page 395 Page 399 Page 403 Page 407 Page 411 Page 414 Page 417 Page 420 Page 420 Page 441 Page 444 Page 450 Page 452 Page 452 Page 483 Page 485 Page 487 Page 489 Page 484 HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strafge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support lt gt 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E mail service nc pgm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls gt 49 8669 31 3105 E mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de 3 D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN help you to reduce non cutting time For example in e workpiece alignment e datum setting e workpiece measurement e digitizing 3 D surfaces with the workpiece touch probes TS 220 with cable TS 640 with infrared transmission e tool measurement e wear monitoring e tool breakage monitoring with the tool touch probe TT 140 870 388 20 Ver00 SWO5 30 12 2008 FWY Printed in Germany AUT
292. on and the result of measurement are to be referenced to the actual coordinate system ACT can be shifted or rotated or to the machine coordinate system REF 0 Probe in the current system and save measurement result in the ACT system 1 Probe in the machine based REF system and save measurement result in the REF system Error mode 0 0FF 1 0N Specify whether the TNC is to issue an error message if the stylus is deflected at cycle start If you select mode 1 the TNC saves the value 2 0 in the 4th result parameter and continues the cycle Error mode 0 0FF 1 0N Specify whether the TNC is to issue an error message if the stylus is deflected at cycle start If you select mode 1 the TNC saves the value 2 0 in the 4th result parameter and continues the cycle 0 Issue error message 1 Do not issue error message Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 17 5 MEASURING IN 3 D Cycle 4 FCL 3 function Cycle run Touch probe cycle 4 measures any position on the workpiece in the probing direction defined by a vector Unlike other measuring cycles Cycle 4 enables you to enter the measuring path and feed rate directly Also the touch probe retracts by a definable value after determining the measured value 1 The touch probe moves from the current position at the entered feed rate in the defined probing direction Define the probing direction in the cycle by using a vector delta values in X Y
293. ool is retracted at FMAX to the setup clearance Please note while programming the starting point first in the working plane and then in the spindle axis From the current position the TNC positions the tool at Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G230 10 3 MULTIPASS H Cycle 230 DIN ISO o il G230 10 3 MULTIPASS vine Cycle 230 DIN ISO m x D 3 poe O e e o A 246 Cycle parameters Starting point in lst axis Q225 absolute Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute Height in the spindle axis at which multipass milling is carried out Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length 0218 incremental Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 1st axis Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Second side length 0219 incremental Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 2nd axis I
294. ool is rotating Measuring individual teeth You can program the cycles for tool measurement in the Programming and Editing mode of operation via the TOUCH PROBE key The following cycles are available Calibrating the TT Cycles 30 and 480 i F Page 483 CAL caL amp Calibrating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 aa Page 484 Measuring the tool length Cycles 31 and 481 asi 31 Page 485 Measuring the tool radius Cycles 32 and 482 aaa a Page 487 z a Measuring the tool length and radius Cycles 33 and 483 a 2 Page 489 ig F us tool file TOOL T is active E Before working with the measuring cycles you must first enter all the required data into the central tool file and call the tool to be measured with TOOL CALL The measuring cycles can be used only when the central You can also measure tools in a tilted working plane 478 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 The features and the operating sequences are absolutely identical There are only two differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 Cycles 481 to 483 are also available in controls for ISO programming under G481 to G483 Instead of a selectable parameter for the status of the measurement the new cycles use the fixed parameter Q199 Setting the machine parameters The TNC uses the feed rate for probing defined in MP6520 when measuring a tool at standstill When me
295. or boring to the depth of bore 5 Ifa dwelltime is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again Another oriented spindle stop is carried out and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre positioning feed rate to the setup clearance and then if entered to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 ee G204 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 83 il 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN SO G204 Please note while programming 84 Canned Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 204 Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Depth of counterbore 0249 incremental Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive sign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Material thickness Q250 incremental Thickness of the workpiece Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Off center distance Q251 incremental Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet Inout range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Tool edge height Q252 incremental Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing
296. or example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling With Machine Parameter 7420 you can determine where the tool is positioned at the end of Cycles 21 to 24 The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 9 2 SL eo Simple Contour Formula j il 9 2 SL a Simple Contour Formula Entering a simple contour formula You can use soft keys to Interlink various contours in a mathematical formula MACHINING CONTOUR DEF ISLAND Mazz O Show the soft key row with special functions Select the menu for functions for contour and point machining Press the CONTOUR DEF soft key The TNC opens the dialog for entering the contour formula Enter the name of the first subcontour The first subcontour must always be the deepest pocket Confirm with the ENT key Specify via soft key whether the next subcontour is a pocket or an island Confirm with the ENT key Enter the name of the second subcontour Confirm with the ENT key If needed enter the depth of the second subcontour Confirm with the ENT key Carry on with the dialog as described above until you have entered all subcontours As a rule always start the list of subcontours with the deepest pocket If the contour is defined as an island the TNC interprets the entered depth as the island heigh
297. orking Q320 plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 409 il G424 P MEAS RECTAN OUTSIDE Cycle 424 ISO 410 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR424 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program Is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m x D 3 O za e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 16 9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 425 measures the
298. orking plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length Q282 Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range oord 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length Q283 Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q273 9279 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO 404 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF G423 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points MP6140 1 Move at clearance height between measuring 0320 points Alternatively PREDEF Max size limit 1st side length 0284 Maxim
299. os 0 Q 3 j 4 Oo 2 am 2 J Oo om O If the stylus is not deflected within a distance defined in MP 6130 the TNC displays an error message 300 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Cycles in the Manual and El Handwheel Modes In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes the TNC provides touch probe cycles that allow you to Calibrate the touch probe Compensate workpiece misalignment Set reference points Touch probe cycles for automatic operation Besides the touch probe cycles which you can use in the Manual and El Handwheel modes the TNC provides numerous cycles for a wide variety of applications in automatic mode Calibrating the touch probe Chapter 3 Compensating workpiece misalignment Chapter 3 Setting reference points Chapter 3 Automatic workpiece inspection Chapter 3 Automatic workpiece measurement Chapter 4 You can program the touch probe cycles in the Programming and Editing operating mode via the TOUCH PROBE key Like the most recent canned cycles touch probe cycles with numbers greater than 400 use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q260 is always assigned the clearance height Q261 the measuring height etc To simplify programming the TNC shows a graphic during cycle definition In the graphic the parameter that needs to be entered is highl
300. ositioning speed see Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning MP6151 on page 305 New machine parameter for consideration of basic rotation in Manual Operation see Consider a basic rotation in the Manual Operation mode MP6166 on page 304 Cycles 420 to 431 for automatic tool measurement were improved so that the measuring log can now also be displayed on the screen see Recording the results of measurement on page 385 A new cycle that enables you to set global touch probe parameters was introduced see FAST PROBING Cycle 441 DIN ISO G441 FCL 2 function on page 444 New Functions of Software 340 49x 03 New cycle for setting a datum in the center of a slot see SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 FCL 3 function on page 333 New cycle for setting a datum in the center of a ridge see RIDGE CENTER REF PT Cycle 409 DIN ISO G409 FCL 3 function on page 337 New 3 D probing cycle see MEASURING IN 3 D Cycle 4 FCL 3 function on page 439 Cycle 401 now also allows you to compensate workpiece misalignment by rotating the rotary table see BASIC ROTATION from two holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO 6401 on page 313 Cycle 402 now also allows you to compensate workpiece misalignment by rotating the rotary table see BASIC ROTATION over two studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO G402 on page 316 In the cycles for datum setting the results of measurement are available in the Q
301. othing if in Cycle 32 you choose a tolerance value between 110 and 200 of the CAM chord error 296 CAM PP INC Cycles Special Functions il Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 u TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 C i q Cycle parameters 32 Tolerance value T Permissible contour deviation in Example NC blocks ent mm or inches with inch programming Input range O to 99999 9999 HSC MODE Finishing 0 Roughing 1 Activate filter Input value O Milling with increased contour accuracy he TNC uses the filter settings that your machine tool builder has defined for finishing operations Input value 1 Milling at an increased feed rate The TNC uses the filter settings that your machine tool builder has defined for roughing operations The TNC works with optimal smoothing of the contour points which results in a reduction of the machining time Tolerance for rotary axes TA Permissible position error of rotary axes in degrees when M128 is active The TNC always reduces the feed rate in such a way that if more than one axis is traversed the slowest axis moves at Its maximum feed rate Rotary axes are usually much slower than linear axes You can significantly reduce the machining time for programs for more than one axis by entering a large tolerance value e g 10 since the TNC does not always have to move the rotary axis to the given nominal position The contour wil
302. ouch probe axis Cycle 430 only monitors for tool breakage no automatic tool compensation 420 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters 430 oje EE oo Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the bolt hole circle diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Angle of 1st hole Q291 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the first hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 2nd hole Q292 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the second hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 3rd hole Q293 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the third hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Q274 9280 Q273 9279 G430 EAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO q o il G430 EAS BOLT HOLE CIRC Cycle 430 DIN ISO 422 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coo
303. owance in the tool axis Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Path overlap factor 0370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 alternatively PREDEF Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 vertical plunging The TNC plunges perpendicularly regardless of the plunging angle ANGLE defined in the tool table E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E Alternative PREDEF gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing i
304. pecify whether the TNC cuts the slot with climb milling or up cut milling 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point 2 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed slot wall at the milling feed rate Q12 while respecting the finishing allowance for the side 3 Atthe end of the contour the TNC moves the tool to the opposite wall and returns to the infeed point 4 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 If you have defined the tolerance in Q21 the TNC then remachines the slot walls to be as parallel as possible 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle depending on machine parameter 7420 214 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il L uodo 3Jemyos 8ZLD OSI NIQ 8Z 219A Please note while programming Phau 10 S FOVAUNS YAGNITAO 8 i i HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G128 software option 1 28 DIN ISO 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling Cycle Cycle parameters v CO 216 Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance on the slot wall The finishing allowance reduces the slot width by twice the entered value Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearanc
305. pened starting point for drilling 90 95 Drilling 71 79 87 Deepened starting point 90 95 Drilling cycles 68 Dwell time 291 E External thread milling 128 F Face milling 251 Fast probing 444 FCL function 6 Feature content level 6 Floor finishing 194 G Global settings 444 H Helical thread drilling milling 124 Hole measuring 395 I Internal thread milling 113 K Key way milling Roughing finishing 146 Kinematic measurement 448 452 Accuracy 457 Backlash 459 Calibration methods 458 471 473 Hirth coupling 455 Kinematic measurement 452 Kinematics measurement 466 Kinematics save 450 Log function 451 464 475 Measuring points choice of 456 Measuring positions choice of 456 Prerequisites 449 Kinematics measurement Preset compensation 466 KinematicsOpt 448 Index M Machine parameters for 3 D touch probes 303 Machining patterns 55 Measurement results in Q parameters 332 387 Measuring angles 392 Mirror image 270 Multiple measurements 304 O Oriented spindle stop 294 P Pattern definition 55 Pecking 87 94 Deepened starting point 90 95 Point pattern Circular 169 Linear 172 Overview 168 Point patterns Point tables 63 Positioning logic 306 Preset table 332 Probing feed rate 305 Program call Via cycle 2
306. pened starting point in mm min Effective only if 0379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 O the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Z m niia q N S 2 g Z ol as m LLJ al O A LLJ LLJ m m LLJ _ l a Lu ol g Z Y ae G241 m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A 3 10 SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO 96 gt Rotat dir of entry exit 0426 Desired direction of spindle rotation when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input range 3 Spindle rotation with M3 4 Spindle rotation with M4 5 Movement with stationary spindle gt Spindle speed of entry exit 0427 Desired spindle speed when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input range O to 99999 Drilling speed 0428 Desired speed for drilling Input range 0 to 99999 M function for coolant on 0429 M function for switching on the coolant The TNC switches the coolant on if the tool is in the hole at the deepened starting point Input range 0 to 999 M function for coolant off 0430 M function for switching off the coolant The TNC switches the coolant off if the tool is at the hole depth Input rang
307. piece blank Tool call Diameter 20 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il Contour subprogram les rogramming examp q q N HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 207 il 8 1 Fundamentals 8 1 Fundamentals Overview of cylindrical surface cycles 27 CYLINDER SURFACE 27 Page 211 AY 28 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling 28 Page 214 LAY 29 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Page 217 39 CYLINDER SURFACE outside 39 Page 220 contour milling eels 210 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN ISO G127 software option 1 Execution of cycle This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3 D machining Use Cycle 28 if you want to mill guideways on the cylinder The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY The subprogram contains coordinates in a rotary axis and In its parallel axis The rotary axis C for example is parallel to the Z axis The path functions L CHF CR RND APPR except for APPR LCT and DEP are available The dimensions in the rotary axis can be entered as desired either in degrees or in mm or inches You can select the desired dimension type in the cycle definition 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance
308. position and width of a slot or pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in a system parameter 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 1 The first probing is always in the positive direction of the programmed axis 3 Ifyou enter an offset for the second measurement the TNC then moves the touch probe if required at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point If the nominal length is large the TNC moves the touch probe to the secound touch point at rapid traverse If you do not enter an offset the TNC measures the width in the exact opposite direction 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviation in the following O parameters Q156 Actual value of measured length Q157 Actual value of the centerline Q166 Deviation of the measured length Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a
309. positions the touch probe to the Starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC calculates the probe starting points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from MP6140 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing and saves the actual values in the following O parameters IDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155 Actual value of length in the minor axis 15 5 DATUM FROM OU 344 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between the touch probe and workpiece enter high estimates for the
310. programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call E Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the spindle axis such coordinates are ignored m The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram The secondary axes U V W are permitted Characteristics of the canned cycles E The TNC automatically positions the tool to the setup clearance before a cycle E Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them E The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing E For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane E The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling Complex Contour Formula With Machine Parameter 7420 you can determine where the tool is positioned at the end of Cycles 21 to 24 T O gt Q l Y 0 The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 229 il Complex Contour Formula
311. r right The 026025100 CLEARANCE HEIGHT highlighted result parameter belongs to that input parameter oz szs SNIN LIMIT 15T SIDE LL Son ane ai Classification of results ee rieme i canons 6 cee q For some cycles you can inquire the status of measuring results anco ic through the globally effective Q parameters Q180 to Q182 5 54 class ofresas Pavametervawe E O O O O o o o o Measurement results are within tolerance 0180 1 Rework Is required Q181 1 Scrap Q182 1 The TNC sets the rework or scrap marker as soon as one of the measuring values falls outside of tolerance To determine which of the measuring results lies outside of tolerance check the measuring log or compare the respective measuring results 0150 to Q160 with their limit values In Cycle 427 the TNC assumes that you are measuring an outside dimension stud However you can correct the status of the measurement by entering the correct maximum and minimum dimension together with the probing direction defined any tolerance values or maximum minimum The TNC also sets the status markers if you have not dimensions HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 387 a er LL ae So q Tolerance monitoring For most of the cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the TNC perform tolerance monitoring This requires that you define the necessary limit values during cycle definition If you do not wish to monitor fo
312. r service agency If the valuation numbers are too small increase the 464 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Dispersion standard deviation In the log dispersion a term from statistics is used as a measure of accuracy Measured dispersion measured standard deviation means that 68 3 of the actually measured spatial errors are within the specified range Optimized dispersion optimized standard deviation means that 68 3 of the spatial errors to be expected after the correction of the kinematics are within the specified range Measurement uncertainty of angles The TNC always indicates measurement uncertainty in degrees per 1 um of system uncertainty This information is important for evaluating the quality of the measured positioning errors or the backlash of a rotary axis The system uncertainty includes at least the repeatability of the axes backlash as well as the positioning uncertainty of the linear axes positioning errors and of the touch probe Since the TNC does not know the accuracy of the complete system you must make a separate evaluation Example of uncertainty of the calculated positioning errors Positioning uncertainty of each linear axis 10 um Uncertainty of touch probe 2 um Logged measurement uncertainty 0 0002 um System uncertainty SORT 3 102 2 17 4 um Measurement uncertainty 0 0002 um 17 4 um 0 0034 Example of uncertainty o
313. r the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 m x D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 419 measures any coordinate in any axis and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch p
314. r tolerances simply leave the O the default value in the monitoring parameters Tool monitoring For some cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the TNC perform tool monitoring The TNC then monitors whether The tool radius should be compensated because of the deviations from the nominal value values in Q16x The deviations from the nominal value values in Q16x are greater than the tool breakage tolerance Tool compensation This function works only If the tool table is active If tool monitoring is switched on in the cycle enter a tool name or Q330 unequal to 0 Select the tool name input by soft key Specifically to AWT Weber The TNC no longer displays the right single quotation mark If you perform several compensation measurements the TNC adds the respective measured deviation to the value stored in the tool table The TNC always compensates the tool radius in the DR column of the tool table even if the measured deviation lies within the given tolerance You can Inquire whether re working is necessary via Parameter Q181 in the NC program 0181 1 must be reworked For Cycle 427 If an axis of the active working plane is defined as measuring axis Q272 1 or 2 the TNC compensates the tool radius as described above From the defined traversing direction Q267 the TNC determines the direction of compensation If the touch probe axis is defined as measuring axis 0272 3 the TNC compensates the to
315. r you want to calibrate or make a verification measurement 0 Calibrate 1 Measure gt Probing directions Q364 Definition of probing direction s in the working plane 0 Measuring only in the positive direction of the reference axis 1 Measuring only in the positive direction of the minor axis 2 Measuring only in the negative direction of the reference axis 3 Measuring only in the negative direction of the minor axis 4 Measuring in the positive directions of the reference axis and the minor axis 5 Measuring in the positive direction of the reference axis and in the negative direction of the minor axis 6 Measuring in the negative direction of the reference axis and in the positive direction of the minor axis 7 Measuring in the negative directions of the reference axis and the minor axis gt Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and probe contact Q320 is added to MP6540 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur referenced to the active datum Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks G440 E AXIS SHIFT touch probe cycle 440 DIN ISO lt x ir _ i il G441 FCL 2 function 17 7 m PROBING Cycle 441 DIN ISO 17 7 FAST PROBING Cycle 4
316. ram CIRCLE1 Assignment of values for parameters used in PGM CIRCLE31XY Definition of the contour designator for the program CIRCLE31XY Definition of the contour designator for the program TRIANGLE Definition of the contour designator for the program SQUARE Contour formula Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il O co O s Q 02 O 2 O ma O O O Q a HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Contour description program circle at right Contour description program circle at left Contour description program triangle at right Contour description program square at left Complex Contour Formula T O gt Q l Y 0 o i 9 2 SL cyclen Simple Contour Formula m 33 D F Q 5o oS o O O 32 oD os a Sc O og cS O a cS 9 5 5 To re dp r 9 2 SL Cycles with Simple Contour Formula Fundamentals SL cycles and the simple contour formula enable you to form contours by combining up to 9 subcontours pockets or islands in a simple manner You define the individual subcontours geometry data as separate programs In this way any subcontour can be used any number of times The TNC calculates the contour from the selected subcontours contour description programs is limited to 128 contours The number of possible contour elements depends on the type of contour inside or outside contour a
317. ram a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed A floating tap holder is required for tapping It must compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process When a cycle is being run the spindle speed override knob is disabled The teed rate override knob is active only within a limited range which is defined by the machine tool builder refer to your machine manual For tapping right hand threads activate the spindle with M3 for left hand threads use M4 Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G206 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 i j il Cycle parameters 206 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 times the thread pitch Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Total hole depth Q201 thread length in
318. rameters 440 17 6 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT touch probe cycle 440 DIN ISO G440 441 Cycle run 441 Please note while programming 442 Cycle parameters 443 17 7 FAST PROBING Cycle 441 DIN ISO G441 FCL 2 function 444 Cycle run 444 Please note while programming 444 Cycle parameters 445 36 18 1 Kinematic Measurement with TS Touch Probes Option KinematicsOpt 448 Fundamentals 448 Overview 448 18 2 Prerequisites 449 18 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 option 450 Cycle run 450 Please note while programming 450 Cycle parameters 451 Log function 451 18 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 option 452 Cycle run 452 Positioning direction 454 Machines with Hirth coupled axes 455 Choice of number of measuring points 456 Choice of the calibrating ball position on the machine table 456 Notes on the accuracy 457 Notes on various calibration methods 458 Backlash 459 Please note while programming 460 Cycle parameters 461 Log function 464 18 5 PRESET COMPENSATION Cycle 452 DIN ISO G452 option 466 Cycle run 466 Please note while programming 468 Cycle parameters 469 Adjustment of tool changer heads 471 Drift Compensation 473 Log function 475 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 37 il 19 1 Fundamentals 478 Ove
319. rance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks Q355 gt 1 11 Ol G262 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DI G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 so 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 DIN ISO G263 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX Countersinking 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth minus the setup clearance and then at the feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth If a safety clearance to the side has been entered the TNC immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth Then depending on the available space the TNC makes a tangential approach to the core diameter either tangentially from the center or with a pre positioning move to the side and follows a circular path Countersinking at front 5 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front 6 The TNC positions the tool without compensa
320. range O to 99999 9999 Minimum dimension Q289 Minimum permissible length Input range O to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR425 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message G425 gt Tool number for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m X D 3 p D Z O 2a e a A gt Setup clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring h
321. ransfer parameters already in use Use the following procedure As a rule always program DEF active cycles before CALL active cycles If you do want to program a DEF active cycle between the definition and call of a CALL active cycle do it only if there is no common use of specific transfer parameters 44 Using Canned Cycles il Defining a cycle using soft keys CYCL The soft key row shows the available groups of Manual Programming and editing operation DEF cycles BLK FORM 0 2 TOOL CALL 1 Z 55000 L Z 100 RO FMAX L X 20 Y 30 R FMAX M3 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 F Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles for je 6 CYCL DEF 264 THREAD DRILLNG MLLNG THD example DRILLING for the drilling cycles T i 252 Select the desired cycle for example THREAD Qgsi 1 SCLIN OR UP CUT MILLING The TNC initiates the programming dialog 025859 2 SUPPER ADU STOP DIST and asks all required input values At the same time a 038250 DEPTH AT FRONT graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the 0203250 SURFACE COORDINATE right screen window The parameter that is asked for azes 150 Eer ETE te in the dialog prompt is highlighted gt Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key gt The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Defining a cycle using the GOTO function CYCL gt The soft key row shows the available gro
322. rdinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Maximum limit of size Q288 Maximum permissible diameter of bolt hole circle Inout range O to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size Q289 Minimum permissible diameter of bolt hole circle Inout range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR430 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message G430 gt Tool number for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to mon
323. re positions the touch probe or positions it between measuring points Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning MP6151 In MP6151 you define whether the TNC is to position the touch probe at the feed rate defined in MP6150 or at rapid traverse Input value 0 Position at feed rate from MP6150 Input value 1 Pre position at rapid traverse KinematicsOpt Tolerance limit in Optimization mode MP6600 In MP6600 you define the tolerance limit starting from which the TNC displays a note in the Optimizing mode when the measured kinematic data is greater than this limit value The default value is 0 05 The larger the machine the greater these values should be Input range 0 001 to 0 999 KinematicsOpt permissible deviation of the calibration ball radius MP6601 In MP6601 you define the maximum permissible deviation from the entered cycle parameter by the calibration ball radius measured In the cycles Input range 0 01 to 0 1 The TNC calculates the calibration ball radius twice at every measuring point for all 5 touch points If the radius is greater than 0407 MP6601 an error message appears because it could be contamination If the radius found by the TNC is less than 5 0407 MP6601 the TNC also issues an error message HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 MP6150 MP6361 MP6120 MP6360 13 2 Setor Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles j il Executing touch probe cycles All touch probe cycles are DEF act
324. ring program run wee 8 MIRROR IMAGE a Page 270 Mirroring contours C 10 ROTATION 10 Page 272 For rotating contours in the working k plane 11 SCALING FACTOR 1 Page 274 For increasing or reducing the size of contours 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING FACTOR 25 cc Page 276 For increasing or reducing the size of P contours with scaling factors for each axis 19 WORKING PLANE Page 278 Machining in tilted coordinate system on is machines with swivel heads and or rotary tables 260 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Effect of coordinate transformations Beginning of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined it is not called It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel coordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 Execute a miscellaneous function M2 M30 or an END PGM block depending on MP7300 Select a new program Program miscellaneous function M142 Erasing modal program information HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 11 1 Fundamentals i il G54 11 2 um SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO 11 2 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO G54 Effect A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data is based on the new datum The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis in the additional status display Input of rotar
325. rked 28 END PGM STATI MM with the character B E rar O LL ae q S IST SPEL SINm 20 45 2 787 Y 340 071 Z B 8 000 C 8 008 al e S1 08 000 Z S 2500 F STATUS STATUS TOOL aie COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRANSF 482 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement 19 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO G480 Cycle run The TT is calibrated with the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 30 or TCH PROBE 480 See also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 479 The calibration process is automatic The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating tool automatically by rotating the spindle by 180 after the first half of the calibration cycle The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part for example a cylinder pin The resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool measurement Please note while programming The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent on MP 6500 Refer to your Machine Manual Before calibrating the touch probe you must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into the tool table TOOL T The position of the TT within the machine working space must be defined by setting the Machine Parameters 6580 0 to 6580 2 If you change the setting of any of the Machine Parameters 6580 0 to 6580 2 you mu
326. rn Definition PATTERN DEF 55 Application 55 Entering PATTERN DEF definitions 56 Using PATTERN DEF 56 Defining individual machining positions 57 Defining a single row 58 Defining a single pattern 59 Defining individual frames 60 Defining a full circle 61 Defining a circular arc 62 2 4 Point Tables 63 Application 63 Creating a point table 63 Hiding single points from the machining process 64 Selecting a point table in the program 65 Calling a cycle in connection with point tables 66 18 3 1 Fundamentals 68 Overview 68 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO G240 69 Cycle run 69 Please note while programming 69 Cycle parameters 70 3 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 71 Cycle run 71 Please note while programming 71 Cycle parameters 72 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISO G201 73 Cycle run 73 Please note while programming 73 Cycle parameters 74 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G202 75 Cycle run 75 Please note while programming 76 Cycle parameters 77 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 79 Cycle run 79 Please note while programming 80 Cycle parameters 81 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO G204 83 Cycle run 83 Please note while programming 84 Cycle parameters 85 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING C
327. rn Definition PATTERN DEF Application You use the PATTERN DEF function to easily define regular machining patterns which you can call with the CYCL CALL PAT function As with the cycle definitions support graphics that illustrate the respective input parameter are also available for pattern definitions PATTERN DEF is to be used only in connection with the tool A axis Z The following machining patterns are available POINT POINT Page 57 Definition of up to any 9 machining positions ROW Rou Page 58 Definition of a single frame straight or ad rotated PATTERN Page 59 Definition of a single pattern straight rotated or distorted FRAME FRAME Page 60 Definition of a single frame straight rotated or distorted CIRCLE CIRCLE Page 61 Definition of a full circle Ae PITCH CIRCLE PITCH CIR Page 62 Definition of a pitch circle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 EF LLI E a INITION 2 3 Pattern Def EF LLI E A INITION 2 3 Pattern Def Entering PATTERN DEF definitions Press the Special Functions key MACHINING EA Open a PATTERN DEF block ROU Select the desired machining pattern e g a single Tadi row Enter the required definitions and confirm each entry with the ENT key Using PATTERN DEF As soon as you have entered a pattern definition you can call it with the CYCL CALL PAT function see Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT on page 47 The TNC then performs th
328. robe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the programmed starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the programmed probing direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the programmed measuring height and measures the actual position with a simple probing movement 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters 0303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis If you use Cycle 419 several times in succession to save the datum In more than one axis in the preset table you must activate the preset number last written to by Cycle 419 after every execution of Cycle 419 this is not required if you overwrite the active preset HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 MP6140 Q320 Q267 G419 a ne IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO o il G419 15 barum IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 376 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane
329. rt program call G419 k i G419 15 barum IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO The measured bolt hole center shall be written In the preset table so that it may be used at a later time W 80 Call tool O to define the touch probe axis Cycle definition for datum setting in the touch probe axis Touch point X coordinate Touch point Y coordinate Touch point Z coordinate Safety clearance in addition to MP6140 Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Write Z coordinate in line 1 Set touch probe axis to 0 In the preset table PRESET PR save the calculated datum referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il a ne IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Center of the bolt hole circle X coordinate Center of the bolt hole circle Y coordinate Diameter of the bolt hole circle Polar coordinate angle for 1st hole center 1 Polar coordinate angle for 2nd hole center 2 Polar coordinate angle for 3rd hole center 3 Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Enter center of bolt hole circle X and Y in line 1 In the preset table PRESET PR save the calculated datum referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF system Do not set a datum in the touch probe axis
330. run The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finished separately Please note while programming 78 SIDE FINISHING Cae 24 DIN ISO G124 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 195 il G124 7 8 SIDE FINISHING ae 24 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 24 Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 O9 E amp Machining direction 1 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise Alternatively PREDEF gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool during plunging Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for roughing O12 Milling feed rate Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Finishing allowance for side Q14 incremental Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If you enter Q14 O the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 196 Example NC blocks Canned Cycles Contour Pocket il 79 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 DIN ISO G125 Cycle run In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY this cycle facilitates the machining of open and closed contours Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over machining a contour using positioning blocks The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface blemishes It is recommended that you run a grap
331. rview 478 Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 479 Setting the machine parameters 479 Entries in the tool table TOOL T 481 Display the results of measurement 482 19 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO G480 483 Cycle run 483 Please note while programming 483 Cycle parameters 483 19 3 Calibrating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 DIN ISO 6484 484 Fundamentals 484 Cycle run 484 Please note while programming 484 Cycle parameters 484 19 4 Measuring the tool length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO G481 485 Cycle run 485 Please note while programming 486 Cycle parameters 486 19 5 Measuring the tool radius Cycle 32 or 482 ISO G482 Cycle run 487 Please note while programming 487 Cycle parameters 488 19 6 Measuring tool length and radius Cycle 33 or 483 ISO G483 489 Cycle run 489 Please note while programming 489 Cycle parameters 490 cob 487 l il a 1 1 Introduction Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and several special functions are also available as cycles Most cycles use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is alway
332. ry axes EASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO q 458 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Backlash Backlash is a small amount of play between the rotary or angle encoder and the table that occurs when the traverse direction Is reversed If the rotary axes have backlash outside of the control loop it can result in significant error during tilting The cycle automatically activates internal backlash compensation of 1 degree in digital rotary axes without separate position measurement input In the Check mode the TNC runs the measurement series for each axis to be able to reach the measuring positions from both directions The TNC documents the arithmetic mean of absolute values of the measured rotary axis backlash 1mm the TNC does not calculate the backlash The larger the measuring circle radius the more accurately the TNC can determine the backlash See also Log function on page 464 For reasons of accuracy if the measuring circle radius is lt HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G451 option _ KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO o il G451 option 18 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO Please note while programming 460 Note that all functions for tilting in the working plane are reset M128 or FUNCTION TCPM are deactivated Position the calibrating ball on the machine table so that there can be no collisions during the measuring process Before defining the cycle you must s
333. ry axis positions stored in Q parameters Q120 to Q122 Avoid using functions such as M94 modulo rotary axes in order to avoid discrepancies between the actual and nominal positions of rotary axes in multiple definitions N 80 Define the spatial angle for calculation of the compensation Position the rotary axes by using values calculated by Cycle 19 Activate compensation for the spindle axis Activate compensation for the working plane Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Automatic positioning of rotary axes If the rotary axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19 m The TNC can position only controlled axes E In order for the tilted axes to be positioned you must enter a feed rate and a setup clearance in addition to the tilting angles during cycle definition E Use only preset tools the full tool length must be defined E The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting E The TNC performs the tilt at the last programmed feed rate The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the complexity of the swivel head or tilting table Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Define the angle for calculation of the compensation Also define the feed rate and the clearance Activate compensation for the spindle axis Activate compensation for the working plane G80 software option 1 11 9 WORKING PLANE evel DIN ISO i i G80 softwar
334. s 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G410 m X D 3 p D Z O za e a A 15 4 DATUM HOM OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 343 il 15 5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO G411 G411 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 411 finds the center of a rectangular stud and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates Into a datum table or the preset table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC
335. s With the basic rotation function the TNC compensates the calculated value As an alternative you can also compensate the determined misalignment by rotating the rotary table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe in rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 to the starting point for probing the first stud 1 2 hen the probe moves to the entered measuring height 1 and probes four points to find the center of the first stud The touch probe moves on a circular arc between the touch points each of which is offset by 90 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the starting point for probing 5 the second stud The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height 2 and probes four points to find the center of the second stud 5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle This touch probe cycle is not allowed when the tilted working plane function is active If you want to compensate the misalignment by rotating the rotary table the TNC will automatically use the following rotary axes C for tool axis Z B for tool axis Y A for tool axis X 14 4 BAS
336. s assigned the setup clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc 1 1 Introduct 40 Fundamentals Overviews 1 2 Available Cycle Groups Overview of canned cycles The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring DRILLING Page 68 THREAD i Cycles for tapping thread cutting and thread milling ees Page 102 Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots Packers Page 136 Cycles for producing point patterns such as circular or linear hole patterns a Page 168 SL Subcontour List cycles which allow the contour parallel machining of relatively complex Page 180 contours consisting of several overlapping subcontours cylinder surface interpolation ie Cycles for multipass milling of flat or twisted surfaces MULTIPASS Page 242 Coordinate transtormation cycles which enable datum shift rotation mirror image enlarging and re Page 260 reducing for various contours wa Special cycles such as dwell time program call oriented spindle stop and tolerance ARENA Page 290 If required switch to machine specific canned cycles These canned cycles can be integrated by your machine tool builder 1 2 Available Cycle oro HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 41 il a Overview of touch probe cycles O The soft key row shows the available groups of TOUCH cycles T PROBE amp S Cycles for automatic measurement and compensation of workpiece misalignment Page 308 Q C
337. s at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous movement 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance 128 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 bijjso G267 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 129 il G267 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 D Cycle parameters 267 130 Nominal diameter Q335 Nominal thread diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Threads per step Q355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is moved
338. sign the depth 0 if necessary 230 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il Entering a complex contour formula You can use soft keys to interlink various contours in a mathematical formula Show the soft key row with special functions FCT CONTOUR Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining CONTOUR Press the CONTOUR FORMULA soft key The TNC FORMULA then displays the following soft keys Intersected with e g QC10 QC1 amp QC5 Joined with e o e g QC25 QC7 QC18 Ca Complex Contour Formula Joined but w o intersection e g 0C12 QC5 QC25 intersected with complement of e g 0C25 QC1 QC2 Complement of the contour area e g 012 Q11 Opening parenthesis e g 0C12 QC1 QC2 QC3 T O Q V Closing parenthesis e g QC12 QC1 QC2 QC3 Defining a single contour e g QC12 QC1 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 231 il Complex Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles Overlapping contours By default the TNC considers a programmed contour to be a pocket With the functions of the contour formula you can convert a contour from a pocket to an island Pockets and Islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island Subprograms overlapping pockets description programs that are defined in a contour definition program The contour defin
339. st recalibrate the TT Cycle parameters 2 Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle AES axis at which there is no danger of collision with the 400 workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is oe referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the calibration tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from MP6540 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Example NC blocks in old format Example NC blocks in new format 483 G480 19 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO m 19 3 Calibrating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 DIN ISO G484 G484 Fundamentals With Cycle 484 you calibrate the wireless infrared TT 449 tool touch probe The calibration process is not completely automated because the TT s position on the table is not defined Cycle run Insert the calibrating tool Define and start the calibration cycle Position the calibrating tool manually above the center of the touch probe and follow the instructions in the pop up window Ensure that the calibrating tool is located above the measuring surface of the probe contact The calibration process is semi automatic The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating tool by rotating the spindle by 180 after the first half of
340. stance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during helical drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Infeed per helix 0334 incremental Depth of the tool plunge with each helix 360 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Nominal diameter 0335 absolute value Bore hole diameter If you have entered the nominal diameter to be the same as the tool diameter the TNC will bore directly to the entered depth without any helical interpolation Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Roughing diameter Q342 absolute As soon as you enter a value greater than 0 in Q342 the TNC no longer checks the ratio between the nominal diameter and the tool diameter This allows you to rough mill holes whose diameter is more than twice as large as the tool diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling PREDEF use the default value from GLOBAL DEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Y X Example NC b
341. starting point of machining The TNC locates the starting point next to the first point defined in the contour subprogram offset by the tool diameter After the TNC has positioned to the first plunging depth the tool moves on a circular arc at the milling feed rate Q12 tangentially to the contour If so programmed it will leave metal for the finishing allowance At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed contour at the milling feed rate Q12 until the contour train is completed The tool then departs the ridge wall on a tangential path and returns to the starting point of machining Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle depending on machine parameter 7420 220 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il L uodo 3Jemyos 6ELD OSI NIG 6E 219A Please note while programming Phau 4NO UOS spIS NO AOVAUNS AAGNITAD G8 m 221 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 roy Cycle parameters 0 m gt Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between Example NC blocks g Ag the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance on the contour wall Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Setup clearance O6 incremental D
342. stop distance Page 87 Sj N ul e Pan pie 208 BORE MILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance Page 91 pf 241 SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE 2a1 Page 94 DRILLING aa With automatic pre positioning to deepened starting point shaft speed and coolant definition 68 Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO G240 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool is centered at the programmed feed rate F to the entered centering diameter or centering depth 3 If defined the tool remains at the centering depth 4 Finally the tool moves to setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance at rapid traverse FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter 0344 diameter or Q201 depth determines the working direction If you program the diameter or depth 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive diameter or depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the
343. sured basic rotation into the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system gt Reference angle 0 ref axis Q380 Angle with which the TNC is to align the probed straight line Only effective if the rotary axis C is selected 0312 6 Input range 360 000 to 360 000 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 m x D 3 2 D lt O 22 O o 14 5 BASIC i compensation via ro 32 a Yo Co J oO Q E E gt O OW vos gt cQ gt d per G404 14 6 oMileasic ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO 14 6 SET BASIC ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO G404 Cycle run With Touch Probe Cycle 404 you can set any basic rotation Example NC blocks automatically during program run This cycle is intended primarily for resetting a previous basic rotation Cycle parameters apa Preset value for basic rotation Angular value at Ko which the basic rotation is to be set Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the preset datum table in which the TNC is to save the defined basic rotation Input range O to 2999 322 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 14 7 Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis Cycle 405 DIN ISO G405 Cycle run With Touch Probe Cycle 405 you can measure the angular offset between the positive Y axis of the active coordinate system and the center of a hole or the angul
344. t The entered value without an algebraic sign then refers to the workpiece top surface If the depth is entered as 0 then for pockets the depth defined in the Cycle 20 is effective Islands then rise up to the workpiece top surface Contour machining with SL Cycles 240 The complete contour is machined with the SL Cycles 20 to 24 see Overview on page 180 Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il 10 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers four cycles for machining surfaces with the following characteristics Created with a CAD CAM system Flat rectangular surfaces Flat oblique angled surfaces Surfaces that are inclined in any way Twisted surfaces 60 RUN 3 D DATA oo Page 243 For multipass milling of 3 D data in DATA several infeeds 10 1 Fundamentals 230 MULTIPASS MILLING 230 Page 245 For flat rectangular surfaces _ fz 231 RULED SURFACE 231 Page 247 For oblique inclined or twisted surfaces 2 232 FACE MILLING 232 Page 251 For level rectangular surfaces with Je indicated oversizes and multiple infeeds 242 Canned Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 2 RUN 3 D DATA Cycle 30 DIN ISO G60 Cycle run 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX in the tool axis to the setup clearance above the MAX point that you have programmed in the cycle The tool then moves at FMAX in the working plane to the MIN point you have programme
345. t there can be no collisions during the measuring process Before defining the cycle you must set the reference point in the center of the calibrating ball and activate it For rotary axes without separate position encoders select the measuring points in such a way that they have to traverse a distance of 1 to the limit switch The TNC needs this distance for internal backlash compensation For the positioning feed rate when moving to the probing height in the touch probe axis the TNC uses the value from cycle parameter 0253 or machine parameter MP6150 whichever is smaller The TNC always moves the rotary axes at positioning feed rate 0253 while the probe monitoring is inactive If the kinematic data attained in the optimize mode are greater than the permissible limit MP6600 the TNC shows a warning Then you have to confirm acceptance of the attained value by pressing NC start Note that a change in the kinematics always changes the preset as well After an optimization reset the preset In every probing process the TNC first measures the radius of the calibrating ball If the measured ball radius differs from the entered ball radius by more than you have defined in machine parameter MP6601 the TNC shows an error message and ends the measurement If you interrupt the cycle during the measurement the kinematic data might no longer be in the original condition Save the active kinematic configuration before an optimization w
346. t clearance height between measuring points Alternatively PREDEF t by rotating the C ax Cycle 405 DIN ISO ignmen gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the C axis to zero or write the angular offset in column C of the datum table 0 Set display of C to 0 gt 0 Write the angular misalignment including algebraic sign in the datum table Line number value of 0337 If a C axis shift is registered in the datum table the TNC adds the measured angular misalignment lece misa ro 14 7 Compensatin 326 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 14 7 vompen nap HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Center of the 1st hole X coordinate Center of the 1st hole Y coordinate Center of the 2nd hole X coordinate Center of the 2nd hole Y coordinate Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Angle of the reference line Compensate misalignment by rotating the rotary table Set the display to zero after the alignment Part program call n LO x CS og To O DS 2 wO t O LO O gt 2 o a A 2 O c f am D E AL ov S i Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting a er LL ae LO q 15 1 Fundamentals Overview The
347. t range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Relative measuring path in Y Y component of the direction vector defining the direction in which the touch probe is to move Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Relative measuring path in Z Z component of the direction vector defining the direction in which the touch probe is to move Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Maximum measuring path Enter the maximum distance from the starting point by which the touch probe may move along the direction vector Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for measurement Enter the measuring feed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 3000 000 gt Maximum retraction path Traverse path in the direction opposite the probing direction after the stylus was deflected Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Reference system 0 ACT 1 REF Specify whether the result of measurement is to be saved in the actual coordinate system IST can therefore be shifted or rotated or with respect to the machine coordinate system REF 0 Save the measurement result in the ACT system 1 Save the measurement result in the REF system Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 17 66 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT touch probe cycle 440 DIN ISO G440 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 440 measures the axis shifts of the machine Make sure that the cylindrical calibrating tool used in connection with the TT 130 has the correct dimensions 1 The TNC pos
348. t range O to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size for the stud Q278 Minimum permissible diameter for the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 O Y Z m N N Q gt Lid Y O LLJ l Q oc O v lt LLJ 1 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 401 il Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR422 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program Is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message G422 gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 388 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0
349. table that you program that was nested with CALL PGM If you want the TNC to call the last defined canned cycle at the points defined in a point table then program the cycle call with CYCLE CALL PAT To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL PAT soft key to call a point table Enter the feed rate at which the TNC Is to move from point to point if you make no entry the TNC will move at the last programmed feed rate FMAX not valid If required enter a miscellaneous function M then confirm with the END key The TNC retracts the tool to the safety clearance between the starting points Depending on which is greater the TNC uses either the spindle axis coordinate from the cycle call or the value from cycle parameter Q204 as the safety clearance If you want to move at reduced feed rate when pre positioning in the spindle axis use the miscellaneous function M108 Effect of the point tables with SL cycles and Cycle 12 The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift Effect of the point tables with Cycles 200 to 208 and 262 to 267 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the hole centers If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate Q203 as 0 Effect of the point tables with Cycles 210 to 215 The TNC interprets the points as an addi
350. tals 14 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides five cycles that enable you to measure and compensate workpiece misalignment In addition you can reset a basic rotation with Cycle 404 400 BASIC ROTATION Automatic 400 Page 310 measurement using two points m Compensation via basic rotation 401 ROT OF 2 HOLES Automatic 401 Page 313 measurement using two holes Compensation via basic rotation 402 ROT OF 2 STUDS Automatic 402 Page 316 measurement using two studs Compensation via basic rotation 403 ROT IN ROTARY AXIS Automatic 403 Page 319 measurement using two points Compensation by turning the table 405 ROT IN C AXIS Automatic a05 Page 323 alignment of an angular offset between 6i a hole center and the positive Y axis Compensation via table rotation 404 SET BASIC ROTATION Setting any R Page 322 aga basic rotation a 308 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment For Cycles 400 401 and 402 you can define through parameter Q307 Default setting for basic rotation whether the measurement result is to be corrected by a known angle see figure at right This enables you to measure the basic rotation against any straight line 1 of the workpiece and to establish the reference to the actual 0 direction 2 14 1 Fundamentals HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 309 il G400 MBeasic ROTATION C
351. te the defined traverse direction Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured angle in the following Q parameter reference axis of the machining plane Please note while programming tool call to define the touch probe axis Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a If touch probe axis measuring axis set Q263 equal to Q265 if the angle about the A axis is to be measured set Q263 not equal to Q265 if the angle is to be measured about the B axis 392 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters 420 ei lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 9
352. ted from the bore hole Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Canned Cycles Drilling il 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO G205 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the entered setup clearance above the workpiece surface at rapid traverse FMAX If you enter a deepened starting point the TNC moves at the defined positioning feed rate to the setup clearance above the deepened starting point The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the setup clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the setup clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 ee G205 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO G205 Please note while programming 88
353. ternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth and no chip breaking is defined Dwell time at top 0210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at setup clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release Input range O to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Decrement Q212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 ee G203 G203 m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO 82 gt No of breaks before retracting Q213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip release For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value in Q256 Input range 0 to 99999 gt Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental If you have
354. the calibration cycle The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part for example a cylinder pin The resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC Please note while programming The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent on MP 6500 Refer to your Machine Manual Before calibrating the touch probe you must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into the tool table TOOL T The TT needs to be recalibrated if you change its position on the table Cycle parameters Cycle 484 has no cycle parameters B Calibrating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 DIN ISO 484 memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool measurement Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il 19 4 Measuring the tool length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO G481 Cycle run To measure the tool length program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 31 or TCH PROBE 480 See also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 479 Via input parameters you can measure the length of a tool by three methods If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT you can measure the tool while it is rotating If the tool diameter is smaller than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT or if you are measuring the length of a drill or spherical cutter you can measure the tool while It is at standstill If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter o
355. the tool used and the slot depth The smaller the tolerance is defined the more exact the slot is and the longer the remachining takes Recommendation Use a tolerance of 0 02 mm Function inactive Enter O default setting Input range O to 9 9999 Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Cycle 29 DIN ISO G129 software option 1 Cycle run This cycle enables you to program a ridge In two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface With this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are always parallel Program the midpoint path of the ridge together with the tool radius compensation With the radius compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the ridge with climb milling or up cut milling At the ends of the ridge the TNC always adds a semicircle whose radius is half the ridge width 1 The TNC positions the tool over the starting point of machining The TNC calculates the starting point from the ridge width and the tool diameter It is located next to the first point defined in the contour subprogram offset by half the ridge width and the tool diameter The radius compensation determines whether machining begins from the left 1 RL climb milling or the right of the ridge 2 RR up cut milling 2 After the TNC has positioned to the first plunging depth the tool moves on a circular arc at the mil
356. these complex requirements A 3 D touch probe cycle measures the rotary axes on your machine Tully automatically regardless of whether they are in the form of tables or spindle heads A calibration ball is fixed at any position on the machine table and measured with a resolution that you define You simply define for each rotary axis the area that you want to measure From the measured values the TNC calculates the static tilting accuracy The software minimizes the positioning error arising from the tilting movements and at the end of the measurement process automatically saves the machine geometry In the respective machine constants of the kinematic table Overview The TNC offers cycles that enable you to automatically save check and optimize the machine kinematics asurement with TS Touch Probes Option KinematicsOpt 450 SAVE KINEMATICS Automatically ase Page 450 saving and restoring kinematic aS p configurations 451 MEASURE KINEMATICS Page 452 Automatically checking or optimizing the machine kinematics 452 PRESET COMPENSATION Page 466 Automatically checking or optimizing the gt I machine kinematics xX a 00 448 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il 18 2 Prerequisites The following are prerequisites for using the KinematicsOpt option The software options 48 KinematicsOpt and 8 software option1 and FCL3 must be enabled The 3 D touch probe used for th
357. tion deviation in X Permissible position deviation in Y Save measuring log to a file Do not display an error message in case of a tolerance violation No tool monitoring Retract in the tool axis end program o i Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions 17 1 Fundamentals 17 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides six cycles for the following special purposes 2 CALIBRATE TS Radius calibration of Page 435 the touch trigger probe 9 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH Length a CALL Page 436 calibration of the touch trigger probe oe 3 MEASURING Cycle for defining OEM Page 437 cycles 4 MEASURING IN 3 D Measuring cycle M p Page 439 for 3 D probing for defining OEM cycles lt 440 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT aao o Page 441 e1 441 FAST PROBING a41 Page 444 pal ally 434 Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 17 2 CALIBRATE TS Cycle 2 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 2 automatically calibrates a touch trigger probe using a ring gauge or a precision stud as calibration standard 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse value from MP6150 to the clearance height but only if the current position is below the clearance height Then the TNC positions the touch probe in the working plane to the center of the ring gauge calibration from inside or in its proximity calibration from outside The touch probe then moves to the measuring depth result of machine parameters 618x 2 and 6185 x and probes the ring g
358. tion from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 7 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 8 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 9 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance 116 Canned Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 bijjjso G263 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 117 il G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 so Cycle parameters oes Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 t
359. tion is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle is called Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Pocket position Q367 Position of the pocket in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position Center of pocket 1 Tool position Lower left corner 2 Tool position Lower right corner 3 Tool position Upper right corner 4 Tool position Upper left corner Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle _ G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle wee 140 Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q309 incremental Finishing allowance in the tool axis Inout range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Setup clearance Q200
360. tional datum shift If you want to use the points defined in the point table as starting point coordinates you must define the starting points and the workpiece surface coordinate 0203 in the respective milling cycle as 0 Effect of the point tables with Cycles 251 to 254 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the cycle starting point If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate 0203 as 0 66 Using Canned Cycles il Canned Cycles Drilling 3 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers 9 cycles for all types of drilling operations 240 CENTERING 240 Page 69 With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance optional entry of the centering diameter or centering depth 200 DRILLING 200 Page 71 With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance ui N F 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance Page 73 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance N a Page 75 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance chip breaking and decrementing Page 79 N 1 204 BACK BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance N 2 Page 83 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING With automatic pre positioning 2nd setup clearance chip breaking and advanced
361. tions anned Cycles Contour Pocket Canned Cycles Cylindrical Surface Canned Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula Canned Cycles Multipass Milling oyctes Coordinate Transformations ycles Special Functions Jsing Touch Probe Cycles ment of Workpiece Misalignment Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection out Probe Cycles Special Functions Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Vieasurement 15 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measure A A 1 1 Introduction 40 1 2 Available Cycle Groups 41 Overview of canned cycles 41 Overview of touch probe cycles 42 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 17 il 2 1 Working with Canned Cycles 44 Machine specific cycles 44 Defining a cycle using soft keys 45 Defining a cycle using the GOTO function 45 Calling cycles 46 Working with the secondary axes U V W 49 2 2 Program Defaults for Cycles 50 Overview 50 Entering GLOBAL DEF definitions 51 Using GLOBAL DEF information 51 Global data valid everywhere 52 Global data for drilling operations B2 Global data for milling operations with pocket cycles 25x 53 Global data for milling operations with contour cycles 53 Global data for positioning behavior 53 Global data for probing functions 54 2 3 Patte
362. tip 0320 is added to MP6140 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points O 0 Move at measuring height between measuring tT points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points t Alternatively PREDEF 0 Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the _ datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the slot center If you enter Q305 0 LL the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the slot center Input range O to 00 2999 New datum 0405 absolute Coordinate in the g measuring axis at which the TNC should set the calculated slot center Default setting O Input O range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 T Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum Is to be saved in the Z datum table or in the preset table 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table A The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The a reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system Q Q aed 0
363. to 99999 9999 Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to calculate the infeeds Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 End point in 3rd axis Q386 absolute Coordinate in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face milled Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length 0218 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first milling path in reference to the starting point in the 1st axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first stepover in reference to the starting point in the 2nd axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Q227 G232 10 5 FACE H Cycle 232 DIN ISO Q386 j il G232 10 5 FACE P Cycle 232 DIN ISO 254 Maximum plunging depth Q202 incremental value Maximum amount that the tool is advanced each time The TNC calculates the actual plunging depth from the difference between the end point and starting point of the tool axis taking the finishing allowance into account so that uniform plunging depths are used each time Input range O to 99999 9999 Allowance for floor Q309 incremental Distance used for the last infeed
364. tool axis to setup clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 G240 G240 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 70 gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Select Depth Diameter 0 1 0343 Select whether centering is based on the entered diameter or depth If the TNC is to center based on the entered diameter the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Centering based on the entered depth 1 Centering based on the entered diameter gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and centering bottom tip of centering taper Only effective if 0343 0 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Diameter algebraic sign 0344 Centering diameter Only effective if Q343 1 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during centering in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd setup clear
365. tour cycles Setup clearance Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface for automated approach of the cycle start position in the tool axis Clearance height Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle Overlap factor The tool radius multiplied by the overlap factor equals the lateral stepover Climb or up cut Select the type of milling The parameters apply to SL cycles 20 22 23 24 and 25 Global data for positioning behavior Positioning behavior Retraction in the tool axis at the end of the machining step Return to the 2nd setup clearance or to the position at the beginning of the working unit The parameters apply to each canned cycle that you call with the CYCL CALL PAT function HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 2 2 Program Defaults for t 2 2 Program Defaults for Bites Global data for probing functions Setup clearance Distance between stylus and workpiece surface for automated approach of the probing position Clearance height Ihe coordinate in the touch probe axis to which the TNC traverses the touch probe between measuring points if the Move to clearance height option Is activated Move to clearance height Select whether the TNC moves the touch probe to the setup clearance or clearance height between the measuring points Applies for all Touch Probe Cycles 4xx 54 Using Canned Cycles il 2 3 Patte
366. tour Pocket il Please note while programming This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling with Cycle 21 You define the plunging behavior of Cycle 22 with parameter Q19 and with the tool table in the ANGLE and LCUTS columns If Q19 0 is defined the TNC always plunges perpendicularly even if a plunge angle ANGLE is defined for the active tool If you define the ANGLE 90 the TNC plunges perpendicularly The reciprocation feed rate Q19 is used as plunging feed rate If the reciprocation feed rate Q19 is defined in Cycle 22 and ANGLE is defined between 0 1 and 89 999 in the tool table the TNC plunges helically at the defined ANGLE If the reciprocation feed is defined in Cycle 22 and no ANGLE is in the tool table the TNC displays an error message If geometrical conditions do not allow helical plunging slot geometry the TNC tries a reciprocating plunge The reciprocation length is calculated from LCUTS and ANGLE reciprocation length LCUTS tan ANGLE If you clear out an acute inside corner and use an overlap factor greater than 1 some material might be left over Check especially the innermost path in the test run graphic and if necessary change the overlap factor slightly This allows another distribution of cuts which often provides the desired results During fine roughing the TNC does not take a defined wear value DR of the coarse roughing tool into account Feed rate re
367. uch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in parameters Q115 to Q119 Please note while programming Danger of collision Pre position the touch probe in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point Is approached Cycle parameters 1 mA Probing axis Enter the probing axis with the axis Example NC blocks selection keys or ASCII keyboard Confirm your entry with the ENT key Input range X Y or Z Probing angle Angle measured from the probing axis at which the touch probe is to move Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 Nominal position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 To conclude the input press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 391 il G420 16 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO 16 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO G420 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 420 measures the angle that any straight surface on the workpiece describes with respect to the reference axis of the working plane 1 Q150 The measured angle is referenced to the Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the programmed starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposi
368. ud center Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system MP6140 Q320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate o
369. ue for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining will be carried out counterclockwise otherwise machining will be clockwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an angle step of 0 the TNC will calculate the angle step from the starting and stopping angles and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter a value other than 0 the TNC will not take the stopping angle into account The sign for the angle step determines the working direction clockwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Number of repetitions 0241 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle Input range 1 to 99999 Canned Cycles Pattern Definitions il gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd setup clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the setup clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set
370. uired for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set by the machine manufacturer see your machine manual Please note while programming Cycle parameters Cycle 13 is used internally for machining cycles 202 204 and 209 Please note that if required you must program Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the machining cycles mentioned above m Angle of orientation Enter the angle referenced to i the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 0000 to 360 0000 294 Example NC blocks Cycles Special Functions il 12 5 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 Cycle function Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the O machine tool builder for use of this cycle With the entries in Cycle 32 you can influence the result of HSC machining with respect to accuracy surface definition and speed inasmuch as the TNC has been adapted to the machine s characteristics The TNC automatically smoothens the contour between two path elements whether compensated or not The tool has constant contact with the workpiece surface an
371. um permissible length of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 1st side length Q285 Minimum permissible length of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Max size limit 2nd side length Q286 Maximum permissible width of the pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Min size limit 2nd side length Q287 Minimum permissible width of the pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 405 il G423 iM meas RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO 406 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log with the standard setting the TNC saves the log file TCHPR423 TXT in the directory in which your measuring program Is also stored 2 Interrupt the program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt the program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error
372. umber in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the line intersection If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the intersection of the connecting lines Input range O to 2999 G418 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the calculated intersection of the connecting lines Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated intersection of the connecting lines Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 332 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system O Y Z A 00 Q gt Y LLJ al O L LL O as LLJ lt LLJ 15 12 DATUM HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 373 il G418 ENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO lt A N Zz LO 374 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whethe
373. up clearance between machining operations Alternatively PREDEF gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between machining operations 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 Q204 Q200 Example NC blocks 6 2 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle l DIN ISO G220 G221 DIN ISO 6 3 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 22 6 3 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 DIN ISO G221 Cycle run 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence Move to the 2nd setup clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the setup clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at the setup clearance or the 2nd setup clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the Tirst line 5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where It carries out the machining operation 6 From this position the tool approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the negative r
374. ups of DEF cycles 2 1 Working with Canned w GOTO gt The TNC shows an overview of cycles in a pop up window D B Choose the desired cycle with the arrow keys or gt Choose the desired cycle with CTRL and the arrow keys for pagewise scrolling or Enter the cycle number and confirm it with the ENT key The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as described above Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 45 il N 2 1 Working with Canned Cycle Calling cycles The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must not be called E Cycle 220 for point patterns on circles and Cycle 221 for point patterns on lines E SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY E SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA E Cycle 32 TOLERANCE E Coordinate transformation cycles E Cycle 9 DWELL TIME E All touch probe cycles You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows 46 Using Canned Cycles il Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL The CYCL CALL function calls the most recently defined canned cycle once The starting point of the cycle is the position that was programmed last before the CYCL CALL block To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle call If necessary enter the miscellaneous function M for example M3 to switch the spindle on or end the dialog by pressing the END key Calli
375. ut The pocket floor is approached tangentially 142 Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position circle center with radius compensation RO The TNC runs the cycle in the axes machining plane with which you approached the starting position For example in Xand Y if you programmed CYCL CALL POS X Y or in U and V if you programmed CYCL CALL POS U V The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note Parameter Q204 2nd setup clearance The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting position At the end of a roughing operation the TNC positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid traverse The tool is above the current pecking depth by the setup clearance Enter the setup clearance so that the tool cannot jam because of chips Danger of collision Enter in MP7441 bit 2 whether the TNC should output an error message bit 2 1 or not bit 2 0 if a positive depth is entered Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his mea
376. when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the first plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 Lower advanced stop distance Q259 incremental Setup clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the last plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 lt A LO N gt z 9 xX Q LLI A ol lt Y cc LLI lt s G205 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO 90 gt Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental Depth at which the TNC carries out chip breaking No chip breaking if O is entered Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking The TNC retracts the tool at a feed rate of 3000 mm min Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 alternatively PREDEF Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled to a certain depth The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the setup clearance to the deepened starting point Input range 0 to 9999
377. xecuted in a non tilted plane If required define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE with other angular values to execute machining in a different axis position In this case itis not necessary to reset Cycle 19 You can define the new angular values directly Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE program 0 for all rotary axes Disable the WORKING PLANE function redefine Cycle 19 and answer the dialog question with NO ENT Reset datum shift if required Position the rotary axes to the 0 position if required 2 Clamp the workpiece 3 Preparations in the operating mode Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Pre position the rotary axis axes to the corresponding angular value s for setting the datum The angular value depends on the selected reference plane on the workpiece 284 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il 4 Preparations in the operating mode Manual Operation Use the 3D ROT soft key to set the function TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE in the Manual Operating mode For open loop axes enter the angular values for the rotary axes into the menu If the axes are not controlled the angular values entered in the menu must correspond to the actual position s of the rotary axis or axes respectively The TNC will otherwise calculate a wrong datum 5 Datum setting Manually by touching the workpiece with the tool in the untilted coordinate system Controlled with a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manu
378. y A Cycles for automatic tool measurement Page 478 enabled by the machine tool builder A 302 Using Touch Probe Cycles il 13 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles To make It possible to cover the widest possible range of applications machine parameters enable you to determine the behavior common to all touch probe cycles Maximum traverse to touch point MP6130 If the stylus is not deflected within the path defined in MP6130 the TNC outputs an error message Safety clearance to touch point MP6140 In MP6140 you define how far from the defined or calculated touch point the TNC is to pre position the touch probe The smaller the value you enter the more exactly must you define the touch point position In many touch probe cycles you can also define a setup clearance in addition that is added to Machine Parameter 6140 Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction MP6165 To increase measuring accuracy you can use MP 6165 1 to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe direction before every probe process In this way the stylus is always deflected in the same direction If you change MP6165 you must recalibrate the touch probe because its deflection behavior changes HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 X MP6130 X MP6140 13 2 setor Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles j il 13 2 Betori Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles Consider a basic rotation
379. y axes is also permitted Resetting Program a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition Use the TRANS DATUM RESET function Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Graphics If you program a new BLK FORM after a datum shift you can use MP 7310 to determine whether the BLK FORM is referenced to the current datum or to the original datum Referencing a new BLK FORM to the current datum enables you to display each part in a program in which several pallets are machined Cycle parameters OoOO Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new datum Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Input range Up to 6 NC axes each from 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 262 Example NC blocks Cycles Coordinate Transformations il 11 3 DATUM shift with datum tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 Effect Datum tables are used for frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum table Resetting Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc dir
380. y machined stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank diameter 0222 Diameter of the workpiece blank Enter the workpiece blank diameter greater than the finished diameter The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between the workpiece blank diameter and finished diameter is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Alternatively PREDEF Canned Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO FU FZ gt Setup clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively PREDEF
381. ycle 205 DIN ISO G205 87 Cycle run 87 Please note while programming 88 Cycle parameters 89 3 9 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 91 Cycle run 91 Please note while programming 92 Cycle parameters 93 3 10 SINGLE FLUTED DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO G241 94 Cycle run 94 Please note while programming 94 Cycle parameters 95 3 11 Programming examples 97 HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 19 il 4 1 Fundamentals 102 Overview 102 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 DIN ISO G206 103 Cycle run 103 Please note while programming 103 Cycle parameters 104 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 DIN ISO G207 105 Cycle run 105 Please note while programming 106 Cycle parameters 107 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 DIN ISO G209 108 Cycle run 108 Please note while programming 109 Cycle parameters 110 4 5 Fundamentals of thread milling 111 Prerequisites 111 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 113 Cycle run 113 Please note while programming 114 Cycle parameters 115 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 DIN ISO G268 116 Cycle run 116 Please note while programming 117 Cycle parameters 118 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 DIN ISO G264 120 Cycle run
382. ycle 400 DIN ISO 14 2 BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO G400 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 400 determines a workpiece misalignment by measuring two points which must lie on a straight surface With the basic rotation function the TNC compensates the measured value 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 306 the TNC positions the touch probe to the programmed starting point 1 at rapid traverse value from MP6150 or MP6361 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate MP6120 or MP6360 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle 310 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Cycle parameters lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first tou
383. ycle 415 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN ITNC 530 363 il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G415 m x D 3 O T e zA A INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO LL lt m vd LO 364 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 15 10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO G416 Cycle run Touch Probe Cy
384. ycles for automatic workpiece presetting Page 330 2 F Cycles for automatic workpiece inspection Page 384 gt lt Calibration cycles special cycles Page 434 N Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement Page 448 Cycles for automatic tool measurement enabled by the machine tool builder Page 478 If required switch to machine specific touch probe cycles These touch probe cycles can be integrated by your machine tool builder 42 Fundamentals Overviews il 2 1 Working with Canned Pies 2 1 Working with Canned Cycles Machine specific cycles In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles many machine tool builders offer their own cycles in the TNC These cycles are available in a separate cycle number range Cycles 300 to 399 Machine specitic cycles that are to be defined through the CYCLE DEF key Cycles 500 to 599 Machine specific touch probe cycles that are to be defined through the TOUCH PROBE key Refer to your machine manual for a description of the Ci specific function Sometimes machine specific cycles also use transfer parameters that HEIDENHAIN already used in the standard cycles The TNC executes DEF active cycles as soon as they are defined See also Calling cycles on page 46 It executes CALL active cycles only after they have been called See also Calling cycles on page 46 When DEF active cycles and CALL active cycles are used simultaneously it is important to prevent overwriting of t

670 388-20 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents